diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html')
| -rw-r--r-- | docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html | 19015 |
1 files changed, 19015 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html b/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..183cefbd3b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html @@ -0,0 +1,19015 @@ +<HTML +><HEAD +><TITLE +>smb.conf</TITLE +><META +NAME="GENERATOR" +CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.57"></HEAD +><BODY +CLASS="REFENTRY" +BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" +TEXT="#000000" +LINK="#0000FF" +VLINK="#840084" +ALINK="#0000FF" +><H1 +><A +NAME="SMB.CONF" +>smb.conf</A +></H1 +><DIV +CLASS="REFNAMEDIV" +><A +NAME="AEN5" +></A +><H2 +>Name</H2 +>smb.conf -- The configuration file for the Samba suite</DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN8" +></A +><H2 +>SYNOPSIS</H2 +><P +>The <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file is a configuration + file for the Samba suite. <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> contains + runtime configuration information for the Samba programs. The + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file is designed to be configured and + administered by the <A +HREF="swat.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>swat(8)</B +> + </A +> program. The complete description of the file format and + possible parameters held within are here for reference purposes.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN16" +></A +><H2 +>FILE FORMAT</H2 +><P +>The file consists of sections and parameters. A section + begins with the name of the section in square brackets and continues + until the next section begins. Sections contain parameters of the + form</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>name</I +></TT +> = <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>value + </I +></TT +></P +><P +>The file is line-based - that is, each newline-terminated + line represents either a comment, a section name or a parameter.</P +><P +>Section and parameter names are not case sensitive.</P +><P +>Only the first equals sign in a parameter is significant. + Whitespace before or after the first equals sign is discarded. + Leading, trailing and internal whitespace in section and parameter + names is irrelevant. Leading and trailing whitespace in a parameter + value is discarded. Internal whitespace within a parameter value + is retained verbatim.</P +><P +>Any line beginning with a semicolon (';') or a hash ('#') + character is ignored, as are lines containing only whitespace.</P +><P +>Any line ending in a '\' is continued + on the next line in the customary UNIX fashion.</P +><P +>The values following the equals sign in parameters are all + either a string (no quotes needed) or a boolean, which may be given + as yes/no, 0/1 or true/false. Case is not significant in boolean + values, but is preserved in string values. Some items such as + create modes are numeric.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN28" +></A +><H2 +>SECTION DESCRIPTIONS</H2 +><P +>Each section in the configuration file (except for the + [global] section) describes a shared resource (known + as a "share"). The section name is the name of the + shared resource and the parameters within the section define + the shares attributes.</P +><P +>There are three special sections, [global], + [homes] and [printers], which are + described under <EM +>special sections</EM +>. The + following notes apply to ordinary section descriptions.</P +><P +>A share consists of a directory to which access is being + given plus a description of the access rights which are granted + to the user of the service. Some housekeeping options are + also specifiable.</P +><P +>Sections are either file share services (used by the + client as an extension of their native file systems) or + printable services (used by the client to access print services + on the host running the server).</P +><P +>Sections may be designated <EM +>guest</EM +> services, + in which case no password is required to access them. A specified + UNIX <EM +>guest account</EM +> is used to define access + privileges in this case.</P +><P +>Sections other than guest services will require a password + to access them. The client provides the username. As older clients + only provide passwords and not usernames, you may specify a list + of usernames to check against the password using the "user =" + option in the share definition. For modern clients such as + Windows 95/98/ME/NT/2000, this should not be necessary.</P +><P +>Note that the access rights granted by the server are + masked by the access rights granted to the specified or guest + UNIX user by the host system. The server does not grant more + access than the host system grants.</P +><P +>The following sample section defines a file space share. + The user has write access to the path <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/home/bar</TT +>. + The share is accessed via the share name "foo":</P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="SCREEN" +> <TT +CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" +> [foo] + path = /home/bar + writeable = true + </TT +> + </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +><P +>The following sample section defines a printable share. + The share is readonly, but printable. That is, the only write + access permitted is via calls to open, write to and close a + spool file. The <EM +>guest ok</EM +> parameter means + access will be permitted as the default guest user (specified + elsewhere):</P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="SCREEN" +> <TT +CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" +> [aprinter] + path = /usr/spool/public + writeable = false + printable = true + guest ok = true + </TT +> + </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN48" +></A +><H2 +>SPECIAL SECTIONS</H2 +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN50" +></A +><H3 +>The [global] section</H3 +><P +>parameters in this section apply to the server + as a whole, or are defaults for sections which do not + specifically define certain items. See the notes + under PARAMETERS for more information.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN53" +></A +><H3 +>The [homes] section</H3 +><P +>If a section called homes is included in the + configuration file, services connecting clients to their + home directories can be created on the fly by the server.</P +><P +>When the connection request is made, the existing + sections are scanned. If a match is found, it is used. If no + match is found, the requested section name is treated as a + user name and looked up in the local password file. If the + name exists and the correct password has been given, a share is + created by cloning the [homes] section.</P +><P +>Some modifications are then made to the newly + created share:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>The share name is changed from homes to + the located username.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If no path was given, the path is set to + the user's home directory.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>If you decide to use a <EM +>path =</EM +> line + in your [homes] section then you may find it useful + to use the %S macro. For example :</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="USERINPUT" +><B +>path = /data/pchome/%S</B +></TT +></P +><P +>would be useful if you have different home directories + for your PCs than for UNIX access.</P +><P +>This is a fast and simple way to give a large number + of clients access to their home directories with a minimum + of fuss.</P +><P +>A similar process occurs if the requested section + name is "homes", except that the share name is not + changed to that of the requesting user. This method of using + the [homes] section works well if different users share + a client PC.</P +><P +>The [homes] section can specify all the parameters + a normal service section can specify, though some make more sense + than others. The following is a typical and suitable [homes] + section:</P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="SCREEN" +> <TT +CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" +> [homes] + writeable = yes + </TT +> + </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +><P +>An important point is that if guest access is specified + in the [homes] section, all home directories will be + visible to all clients <EM +>without a password</EM +>. + In the very unlikely event that this is actually desirable, it + would be wise to also specify <EM +>read only + access</EM +>.</P +><P +>Note that the <EM +>browseable</EM +> flag for + auto home directories will be inherited from the global browseable + flag, not the [homes] browseable flag. This is useful as + it means setting <EM +>browseable = no</EM +> in + the [homes] section will hide the [homes] share but make + any auto home directories visible.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN79" +></A +><H3 +>The [printers] section</H3 +><P +>This section works like [homes], + but for printers.</P +><P +>If a [printers] section occurs in the + configuration file, users are able to connect to any printer + specified in the local host's printcap file.</P +><P +>When a connection request is made, the existing sections + are scanned. If a match is found, it is used. If no match is found, + but a [homes] section exists, it is used as described + above. Otherwise, the requested section name is treated as a + printer name and the appropriate printcap file is scanned to see + if the requested section name is a valid printer share name. If + a match is found, a new printer share is created by cloning + the [printers] section.</P +><P +>A few modifications are then made to the newly created + share:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>The share name is set to the located printer + name</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If no printer name was given, the printer name + is set to the located printer name</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If the share does not permit guest access and + no username was given, the username is set to the located + printer name.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>Note that the [printers] service MUST be + printable - if you specify otherwise, the server will refuse + to load the configuration file.</P +><P +>Typically the path specified would be that of a + world-writeable spool directory with the sticky bit set on + it. A typical [printers] entry would look like + this:</P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="SCREEN" +><TT +CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" +> [printers] + path = /usr/spool/public + guest ok = yes + printable = yes + </TT +></PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +><P +>All aliases given for a printer in the printcap file + are legitimate printer names as far as the server is concerned. + If your printing subsystem doesn't work like that, you will have + to set up a pseudo-printcap. This is a file consisting of one or + more lines like this:</P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="SCREEN" +> <TT +CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" +> alias|alias|alias|alias... + </TT +> + </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +><P +>Each alias should be an acceptable printer name for + your printing subsystem. In the [global] section, specify + the new file as your printcap. The server will then only recognize + names found in your pseudo-printcap, which of course can contain + whatever aliases you like. The same technique could be used + simply to limit access to a subset of your local printers.</P +><P +>An alias, by the way, is defined as any component of the + first entry of a printcap record. Records are separated by newlines, + components (if there are more than one) are separated by vertical + bar symbols ('|').</P +><P +>NOTE: On SYSV systems which use lpstat to determine what + printers are defined on the system you may be able to use + "printcap name = lpstat" to automatically obtain a list + of printers. See the "printcap name" option + for more details.</P +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN102" +></A +><H2 +>PARAMETERS</H2 +><P +>parameters define the specific attributes of sections.</P +><P +>Some parameters are specific to the [global] section + (e.g., <EM +>security</EM +>). Some parameters are usable + in all sections (e.g., <EM +>create mode</EM +>). All others + are permissible only in normal sections. For the purposes of the + following descriptions the [homes] and [printers] + sections will be considered normal. The letter <EM +>G</EM +> + in parentheses indicates that a parameter is specific to the + [global] section. The letter <EM +>S</EM +> + indicates that a parameter can be specified in a service specific + section. Note that all <EM +>S</EM +> parameters can also be specified in + the [global] section - in which case they will define + the default behavior for all services.</P +><P +>parameters are arranged here in alphabetical order - this may + not create best bedfellows, but at least you can find them! Where + there are synonyms, the preferred synonym is described, others refer + to the preferred synonym.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN112" +></A +><H2 +>VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS</H2 +><P +>Many of the strings that are settable in the config file + can take substitutions. For example the option "path = + /tmp/%u" would be interpreted as "path = + /tmp/john" if the user connected with the username john.</P +><P +>These substitutions are mostly noted in the descriptions below, + but there are some general substitutions which apply whenever they + might be relevant. These are:</P +><P +></P +><DIV +CLASS="VARIABLELIST" +><DL +><DT +>%S</DT +><DD +><P +>the name of the current service, if any.</P +></DD +><DT +>%P</DT +><DD +><P +>the root directory of the current service, + if any.</P +></DD +><DT +>%u</DT +><DD +><P +>user name of the current service, if any.</P +></DD +><DT +>%g</DT +><DD +><P +>primary group name of %u.</P +></DD +><DT +>%U</DT +><DD +><P +>session user name (the user name that the client + wanted, not necessarily the same as the one they got).</P +></DD +><DT +>%G</DT +><DD +><P +>primary group name of %U.</P +></DD +><DT +>%H</DT +><DD +><P +>the home directory of the user given + by %u.</P +></DD +><DT +>%v</DT +><DD +><P +>the Samba version.</P +></DD +><DT +>%h</DT +><DD +><P +>the Internet hostname that Samba is running + on.</P +></DD +><DT +>%m</DT +><DD +><P +>the NetBIOS name of the client machine + (very useful).</P +></DD +><DT +>%L</DT +><DD +><P +>the NetBIOS name of the server. This allows you + to change your config based on what the client calls you. Your + server can have a "dual personality".</P +><P +>Note that this paramater is not available when Samba listens + on port 445, as clients no longer send this information </P +></DD +><DT +>%M</DT +><DD +><P +>the Internet name of the client machine. + </P +></DD +><DT +>%N</DT +><DD +><P +>the name of your NIS home directory server. + This is obtained from your NIS auto.map entry. If you have + not compiled Samba with the <EM +>--with-automount</EM +> + option then this value will be the same as %L.</P +></DD +><DT +>%p</DT +><DD +><P +>the path of the service's home directory, + obtained from your NIS auto.map entry. The NIS auto.map entry + is split up as "%N:%p".</P +></DD +><DT +>%R</DT +><DD +><P +>the selected protocol level after + protocol negotiation. It can be one of CORE, COREPLUS, + LANMAN1, LANMAN2 or NT1.</P +></DD +><DT +>%d</DT +><DD +><P +>The process id of the current server + process.</P +></DD +><DT +>%a</DT +><DD +><P +>the architecture of the remote + machine. Only some are recognized, and those may not be + 100% reliable. It currently recognizes Samba, WfWg, Win95, + WinNT and Win2k. Anything else will be known as + "UNKNOWN". If it gets it wrong then sending a level + 3 log to <A +HREF="mailto:samba@samba.org" +TARGET="_top" +>samba@samba.org + </A +> should allow it to be fixed.</P +></DD +><DT +>%I</DT +><DD +><P +>The IP address of the client machine.</P +></DD +><DT +>%T</DT +><DD +><P +>the current date and time.</P +></DD +><DT +>%$(<TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>envvar</I +></TT +>)</DT +><DD +><P +>The value of the environment variable + <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>envar</I +></TT +>.</P +></DD +></DL +></DIV +><P +>There are some quite creative things that can be done + with these substitutions and other smb.conf options.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN203" +></A +><H2 +>NAME MANGLING</H2 +><P +>Samba supports "name mangling" so that DOS and + Windows clients can use files that don't conform to the 8.3 format. + It can also be set to adjust the case of 8.3 format filenames.</P +><P +>There are several options that control the way mangling is + performed, and they are grouped here rather than listed separately. + For the defaults look at the output of the testparm program. </P +><P +>All of these options can be set separately for each service + (or globally, of course). </P +><P +>The options are: </P +><P +></P +><DIV +CLASS="VARIABLELIST" +><DL +><DT +>mangle case = yes/no</DT +><DD +><P +> controls if names that have characters that + aren't of the "default" case are mangled. For example, + if this is yes then a name like "Mail" would be mangled. + Default <EM +>no</EM +>.</P +></DD +><DT +>case sensitive = yes/no</DT +><DD +><P +>controls whether filenames are case sensitive. If + they aren't then Samba must do a filename search and match on passed + names. Default <EM +>no</EM +>.</P +></DD +><DT +>default case = upper/lower</DT +><DD +><P +>controls what the default case is for new + filenames. Default <EM +>lower</EM +>.</P +></DD +><DT +>preserve case = yes/no</DT +><DD +><P +>controls if new files are created with the + case that the client passes, or if they are forced to be the + "default" case. Default <EM +>yes</EM +>. + </P +></DD +><DT +>short preserve case = yes/no</DT +><DD +><P +>controls if new files which conform to 8.3 syntax, + that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are created + upper case, or if they are forced to be the "default" + case. This option can be use with "preserve case = yes" + to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short names + are lowercased. Default <EM +>yes</EM +>.</P +></DD +></DL +></DIV +><P +>By default, Samba 2.2 has the same semantics as a Windows + NT server, in that it is case insensitive but case preserving.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN236" +></A +><H2 +>NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</H2 +><P +>There are a number of ways in which a user can connect + to a service. The server uses the following steps in determining + if it will allow a connection to a specified service. If all the + steps fail, then the connection request is rejected. However, if one of the + steps succeeds, then the following steps are not checked.</P +><P +>If the service is marked "guest only = yes" then + steps 1 to 5 are skipped.</P +><P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +>If the client has passed a username/password + pair and that username/password pair is validated by the UNIX + system's password programs then the connection is made as that + username. Note that this includes the + \\server\service%<TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>username</I +></TT +> method of passing + a username.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If the client has previously registered a username + with the system and now supplies a correct password for that + username then the connection is allowed.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>The client's NetBIOS name and any previously + used user names are checked against the supplied password, if + they match then the connection is allowed as the corresponding + user.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If the client has previously validated a + username/password pair with the server and the client has passed + the validation token then that username is used. </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If a "user = " field is given in the + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file for the service and the client + has supplied a password, and that password matches (according to + the UNIX system's password checking) with one of the usernames + from the "user =" field then the connection is made as + the username in the "user =" line. If one + of the username in the "user =" list begins with a + '@' then that name expands to a list of names in + the group of the same name.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If the service is a guest service then a + connection is made as the username given in the "guest + account =" for the service, irrespective of the + supplied password.</P +></LI +></OL +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN255" +></A +><H2 +>COMPLETE LIST OF GLOBAL PARAMETERS</H2 +><P +>Here is a list of all global parameters. See the section of + each parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ABORTSHUTDOWNSCRIPT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>abort shutdown script</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add printer command</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ADDSHARECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add share command</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ADDUSERSCRIPT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add user script</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ADDMACHINESCRIPT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add machine script</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ALLOWTRUSTEDDOMAINS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>allow trusted domains</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ANNOUNCEAS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>announce as</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ANNOUNCEVERSION" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>announce version</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#AUTHMETHODS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>auth methods</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#AUTOSERVICES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>auto services</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#BINDINTERFACESONLY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>bind interfaces only</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#BROWSELIST" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>browse list</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#CHANGENOTIFYTIMEOUT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>change notify timeout</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#CHANGESHARECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>change share command</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#CONFIGFILE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>config file</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DEADTIME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>deadtime</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DEBUGHIRESTIMESTAMP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>debug hires timestamp</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DEBUGPID" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>debug pid</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>debug timestamp</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DEBUGUID" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>debug uid</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DEBUGLEVEL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>debuglevel</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DEFAULT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>default</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DEFAULTSERVICE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>default service</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete printer command</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DELETESHARECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete share command</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DELETEUSERSCRIPT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete user script</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DFREECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>dfree command</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DISABLESPOOLSS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>disable spoolss</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DNSPROXY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>dns proxy</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DOMAINADMINGROUP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain admin group</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DOMAINGUESTGROUP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain guest group</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DOMAINLOGONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain logons</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DOMAINMASTER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain master</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>encrypt passwords</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ENHANCEDBROWSING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>enhanced browsing</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ENUMPORTSCOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>enumports command</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#GETWDCACHE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>getwd cache</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#HIDELOCALUSERS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hide local users</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#HIDEUNREADABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hide unreadable</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#HOMEDIRMAP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>homedir map</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#HOSTMSDFS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>host msdfs</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#HOSTSEQUIV" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts equiv</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#INTERFACES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>interfaces</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#KEEPALIVE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>keepalive</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#KERNELOPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>kernel oplocks</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LANMANAUTH" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lanman auth</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LARGEREADWRITE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>large readwrite</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LDAPADMINDN" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ldap admin dn</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LDAPFILTER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ldap filter</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LDAPPORT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ldap port</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LDAPSERVER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ldap server</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LDAPSSL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ldap ssl</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LDAPSUFFIX" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ldap suffix</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LMANNOUNCE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lm announce</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LMINTERVAL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lm interval</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LOADPRINTERS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>load printers</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LOCALMASTER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>local master</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LOCKDIR" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lock dir</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LOCKDIRECTORY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lock directory</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LOGFILE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>log file</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LOGLEVEL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>log level</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LOGONDRIVE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>logon drive</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LOGONHOME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>logon home</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LOGONPATH" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>logon path</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LOGONSCRIPT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>logon script</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LPQCACHETIME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lpq cache time</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MACHINEPASSWORDTIMEOUT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>machine password timeout</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MANGLEDSTACK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>mangled stack</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MAPTOGUEST" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map to guest</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MAXDISKSIZE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max disk size</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MAXLOGSIZE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max log size</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MAXMUX" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max mux</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MAXOPENFILES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max open files</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MAXPROTOCOL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max protocol</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MAXSMBDPROCESSES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max smbd processes</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MAXTTL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max ttl</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MAXWINSTTL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max wins ttl</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MAXXMIT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max xmit</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MESSAGECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>message command</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MINPASSWDLENGTH" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>min passwd length</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MINPASSWORDLENGTH" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>min password length</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MINPROTOCOL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>min protocol</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MINWINSTTL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>min wins ttl</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#NAMERESOLVEORDER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>name resolve order</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#NETBIOSALIASES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>netbios aliases</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#NETBIOSNAME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>netbios name</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#NETBIOSSCOPE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>netbios scope</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#NISHOMEDIR" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>nis homedir</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#NONUNIXACCOUNTRANGE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>non unix account range</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#NTPIPESUPPORT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>nt pipe support</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#NULLPASSWORDS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>null passwords</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>obey pam restrictions</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#OPLOCKBREAKWAITTIME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>oplock break wait time</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#OSLEVEL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>os level</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#OS2DRIVERMAP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>os2 driver map</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>pam password change</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PANICACTION" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>panic action</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PASSDBBACKEND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passdb backend</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PASSWDCHAT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd chat</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PASSWDCHATDEBUG" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd chat debug</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd program</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PASSWORDLEVEL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password level</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password server</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PREFEREDMASTER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>prefered master</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PREFERREDMASTER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preferred master</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PRELOAD" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preload</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PRINTCAP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printcap</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PRINTCAPNAME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printcap name</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PRINTERDRIVERFILE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer driver file</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PRIVATEDIR" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>private dir</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PROTOCOL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>protocol</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#READBMPX" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>read bmpx</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#READRAW" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>read raw</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#READSIZE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>read size</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#REMOTEANNOUNCE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>remote announce</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#REMOTEBROWSESYNC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>remote browse sync</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#RESTRICTANONYMOUS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>restrict anonymous</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ROOT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ROOTDIR" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root dir</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ROOTDIRECTORY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root directory</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SECURITY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SERVERSTRING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>server string</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>show add printer wizard</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SHUTDOWNSCRIPT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>shutdown script</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SMBPASSWDFILE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>smb passwd file</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SOCKETADDRESS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>socket address</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SOCKETOPTIONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>socket options</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SOURCEENVIRONMENT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>source environment</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SSL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SSLCACERTDIR" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl CA certDir</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SSLCACERTFILE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl CA certFile</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SSLCIPHERS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl ciphers</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SSLCLIENTCERT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl client cert</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SSLCLIENTKEY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl client key</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SSLCOMPATIBILITY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl compatibility</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SSLEGDSOCKET" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl egd socket</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SSLENTROPYBYTES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl entropy bytes</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SSLENTROPYFILE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl entropy file</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SSLHOSTS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl hosts</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SSLHOSTSRESIGN" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl hosts resign</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SSLREQUIRECLIENTCERT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl require clientcert</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SSLREQUIRESERVERCERT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl require servercert</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SSLSERVERCERT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl server cert</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SSLSERVERKEY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl server key</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SSLVERSION" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl version</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#STATCACHE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>stat cache</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#STATCACHESIZE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>stat cache size</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#STRIPDOT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>strip dot</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SYSLOG" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>syslog</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SYSLOGONLY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>syslog only</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#TEMPLATEHOMEDIR" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>template homedir</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#TEMPLATESHELL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>template shell</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#TIMEOFFSET" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>time offset</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#TIMESERVER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>time server</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#TIMESTAMPLOGS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>timestamp logs</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#TOTALPRINTJOBS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>total print jobs</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#UNIXEXTENSIONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>unix extensions</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#UNIXPASSWORDSYNC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>unix password sync</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#UPDATEENCRYPTED" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>update encrypted</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#USEMMAP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>use mmap</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#USERHOSTS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>use rhosts</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#USERNAMELEVEL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>username level</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#USERNAMEMAP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>username map</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#UTMP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>utmp</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#UTMPDIRECTORY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>utmp directory</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#WINBINDCACHETIME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>winbind cache time</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#WINBINDENUMUSERS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>winbind enum users</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#WINBINDENUMGROUPS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>winbind enum groups</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#WINBINDGID" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>winbind gid</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#WINBINDSEPARATOR" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>winbind separator</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#WINBINDUID" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>winbind uid</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#WINBINDUSEDEFAULTDOMAIN" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>winbind use default domain</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#WINSHOOK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>wins hook</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#WINSPROXY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>wins proxy</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#WINSSERVER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>wins server</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#WINSSUPPORT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>wins support</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#WORKGROUP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>workgroup</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#WRITERAW" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>write raw</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +></UL +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN971" +></A +><H2 +>COMPLETE LIST OF SERVICE PARAMETERS</H2 +><P +>Here is a list of all service parameters. See the section on + each parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ADMINUSERS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>admin users</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ALLOWHOSTS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>allow hosts</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#AVAILABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>available</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#BLOCKINGLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>blocking locks</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#BROWSABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>browsable</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#BROWSEABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>browseable</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#CASESENSITIVE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>case sensitive</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#CASESIGNAMES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>casesignames</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#COMMENT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>comment</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#COPY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>copy</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#CREATEMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#CREATEMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mode</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DEFAULTCASE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>default case</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DEFAULTDEVMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>default devmode</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DELETEREADONLY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete readonly</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DELETEVETOFILES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete veto files</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DENYHOSTS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>deny hosts</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DIRECTORY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DIRECTORYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory mask</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DIRECTORYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory mode</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory security mask</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DONTDESCEND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>dont descend</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DOSFILEMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>dos filemode</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DOSFILETIMERESOLUTION" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>dos filetime resolution</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#DOSFILETIMES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>dos filetimes</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#EXEC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>exec</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#FAKEDIRECTORYCREATETIMES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>fake directory create times</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#FAKEOPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>fake oplocks</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#FOLLOWSYMLINKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>follow symlinks</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#FORCECREATEMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force create mode</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory mode</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory security mode</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#FORCEGROUP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force group</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#FORCESECURITYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force security mode</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#FORCEUSER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force user</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#FSTYPE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>fstype</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#GROUP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>group</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest account</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#GUESTOK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest ok</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#GUESTONLY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest only</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#HIDEDOTFILES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hide dot files</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#HIDEFILES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hide files</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#HOSTSALLOW" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts allow</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#HOSTSDENY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts deny</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#INCLUDE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>include</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#INHERITPERMISSIONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>inherit permissions</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#INVALIDUSERS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>invalid users</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LEVEL2OPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>level2 oplocks</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LOCKING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>locking</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LPPAUSECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lppause command</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LPQCOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lpq command</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LPRESUMECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lpresume command</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#LPRMCOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lprm command</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MAGICOUTPUT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>magic output</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MAGICSCRIPT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>magic script</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MANGLECASE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>mangle case</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MANGLEDMAP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>mangled map</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MANGLEDNAMES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>mangled names</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MANGLINGCHAR" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>mangling char</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MAPARCHIVE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map archive</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MAPHIDDEN" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map hidden</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MAPSYSTEM" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map system</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MAXCONNECTIONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max connections</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MAXPRINTJOBS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max print jobs</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MINPRINTSPACE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>min print space</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#MSDFSROOT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>msdfs root</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#NTACLSUPPORT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>nt acl support</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ONLYGUEST" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>only guest</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ONLYUSER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>only user</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#OPLOCKCONTENTIONLIMIT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>oplock contention limit</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#OPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>oplocks</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PATH" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>path</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#POSIXLOCKING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>posix locking</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#POSTEXEC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>postexec</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#POSTSCRIPT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>postscript</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PREEXEC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preexec</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PREEXECCLOSE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preexec close</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PRESERVECASE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preserve case</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PRINTCOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>print command</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PRINTOK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>print ok</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PRINTABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printable</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PRINTER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PRINTERADMIN" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer admin</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PRINTERDRIVER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer driver</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PRINTERDRIVERLOCATION" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer driver location</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PRINTERNAME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer name</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PRINTING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#PUBLIC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>public</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>queuepause command</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#QUEUERESUMECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>queueresume command</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#READLIST" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>read list</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#READONLY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>read only</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ROOTPOSTEXEC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root postexec</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ROOTPREEXEC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root preexec</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ROOTPREEXECCLOSE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root preexec close</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SECURITYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security mask</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SETDIRECTORY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>set directory</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SHORTPRESERVECASE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>short preserve case</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#STATUS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>status</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#STRICTALLOCATE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>strict allocate</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#STRICTLOCKING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>strict locking</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#STRICTSYNC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>strict sync</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#SYNCALWAYS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>sync always</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#USECLIENTDRIVER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>use client driver</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#USER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>user</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#USERNAME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>username</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#USERS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>users</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#VALIDUSERS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>valid users</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#VETOFILES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>veto files</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#VETOOPLOCKFILES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>veto oplock files</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#VFSOBJECT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>vfs object</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#VFSOPTIONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>vfs options</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#VOLUME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>volume</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#WIDELINKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>wide links</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#WRITABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>writable</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#WRITECACHESIZE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>write cache size</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#WRITELIST" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>write list</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#WRITEOK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>write ok</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#WRITEABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>writeable</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +></UL +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN1451" +></A +><H2 +>EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER</H2 +><P +></P +><DIV +CLASS="VARIABLELIST" +><DL +><DT +><A +NAME="ABORTSHUTDOWNSCRIPT" +></A +>abort shutdown script (G)</DT +><DD +><P +><EM +>This parameter only exists in the HEAD cvs branch</EM +> + This a full path name to a script called by + <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +> that + should stop a shutdown procedure issued by the <A +HREF="#SHUTDOWNSCRIPT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>shutdown script</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>This command will be run as user.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>None</EM +>.</P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>abort shutdown script = /sbin/shutdown -c</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ADDPRINTERCOMMAND" +></A +>add printer command (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing + support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, The MS Add + Printer Wizard (APW) icon is now also available in the + "Printers..." folder displayed a share listing. The APW + allows for printers to be add remotely to a Samba or Windows + NT/2000 print server.</P +><P +>For a Samba host this means that the printer must be + physically added to the underlying printing system. The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add + printer command</I +></TT +> defines a script to be run which + will perform the necessary operations for adding the printer + to the print system and to add the appropriate service definition + to the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file in order that it can be + shared by <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +> + </A +>.</P +><P +>The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add printer command</I +></TT +> is + automatically invoked with the following parameter (in + order:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer name</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>share name</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>port name</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>driver name</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>location</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>Windows 9x driver location</I +></TT +> + </P +></LI +></UL +><P +>All parameters are filled in from the PRINTER_INFO_2 structure sent + by the Windows NT/2000 client with one exception. The "Windows 9x + driver location" parameter is included for backwards compatibility + only. The remaining fields in the structure are generated from answers + to the APW questions.</P +><P +>Once the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add printer command</I +></TT +> has + been executed, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will reparse the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +> smb.conf</TT +> to determine if the share defined by the APW + exists. If the sharename is still invalid, then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd + </B +> will return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> delete printer command</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#PRINTING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing</I +></TT +></A +>, + <A +HREF="#SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>show add + printer wizard</I +></TT +></A +></P +><P +>Default: <EM +>none</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>addprinter command = /usr/bin/addprinter + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ADDSHARECOMMAND" +></A +>add share command (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically + add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add share command</I +></TT +> is used to define an + external program or script which will add a new service definition + to <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +>. In order to successfully + execute the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add share command</I +></TT +>, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> + requires that the administrator be connected using a root account (i.e. + uid == 0). + </P +><P +> When executed, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will automatically invoke the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add share command</I +></TT +> with four parameters. + </P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>configFile</I +></TT +> - the location + of the global <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>shareName</I +></TT +> - the name of the new + share. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>pathName</I +></TT +> - path to an **existing** + directory on disk. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>comment</I +></TT +> - comment string to associate + with the new share. + </P +></LI +></UL +><P +> This parameter is only used for add file shares. To add printer shares, + see the <A +HREF="#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add printer + command</I +></TT +></A +>. + </P +><P +> See also <A +HREF="#CHANGESHARECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>change share + command</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#DELETESHARECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete share + command</I +></TT +></A +>. + </P +><P +>Default: <EM +>none</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>add share command = /usr/local/bin/addshare</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ADDMACHINESCRIPT" +></A +>add machine script (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is the full pathname to a script that will + be run by <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> when a machine is added + to it's domain using the administrator username and password method. </P +><P +>This option is only required when using sam back-ends tied to the + Unix uid method of RID calculation such as smbpasswd. This option is only + available in Samba 3.0.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>add machine script = <empty string> + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>add machine script = /usr/sbin/adduser -n -g machines -c Machine -d /dev/null -s /bin/false %u + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ADDUSERSCRIPT" +></A +>add user script (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is the full pathname to a script that will + be run <EM +>AS ROOT</EM +> by <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8) + </A +> under special circumstances described below.</P +><P +>Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are + created for all users accessing files on this server. For sites + that use Windows NT account databases as their primary user database + creating these users and keeping the user list in sync with the + Windows NT PDC is an onerous task. This option allows <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> to create the required UNIX users + <EM +>ON DEMAND</EM +> when a user accesses the Samba server.</P +><P +>In order to use this option, <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> + must <EM +>NOT</EM +> be set to <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security = share</I +></TT +> + and <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add user script</I +></TT +> + must be set to a full pathname for a script that will create a UNIX + user given one argument of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%u</I +></TT +>, which expands into + the UNIX user name to create.</P +><P +>When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server, + at login (session setup in the SMB protocol) time, <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> smbd</A +> contacts the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password server</I +></TT +> and + attempts to authenticate the given user with the given password. If the + authentication succeeds then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> + attempts to find a UNIX user in the UNIX password database to map the + Windows user into. If this lookup fails, and <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add user script + </I +></TT +> is set then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will + call the specified script <EM +>AS ROOT</EM +>, expanding + any <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%u</I +></TT +> argument to be the user name to create.</P +><P +>If this script successfully creates the user then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd + </B +> will continue on as though the UNIX user + already existed. In this way, UNIX users are dynamically created to + match existing Windows NT accounts.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#SECURITY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> security</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password server</I +></TT +></A +>, + <A +HREF="#DELETEUSERSCRIPT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete user + script</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>add user script = <empty string> + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>add user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/add_user + %u</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ADMINUSERS" +></A +>admin users (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a list of users who will be granted + administrative privileges on the share. This means that they + will do all file operations as the super-user (root).</P +><P +>You should use this option very carefully, as any user in + this list will be able to do anything they like on the share, + irrespective of file permissions.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>no admin users</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>admin users = jason</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ALLOWHOSTS" +></A +>allow hosts (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#HOSTSALLOW" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts allow</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ALLOWTRUSTEDDOMAINS" +></A +>allow trusted domains (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option only takes effect when the <A +HREF="#SECURITY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security</I +></TT +></A +> option is set to + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>server</TT +> or <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>domain</TT +>. + If it is set to no, then attempts to connect to a resource from + a domain or workgroup other than the one which <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> is running + in will fail, even if that domain is trusted by the remote server + doing the authentication.</P +><P +>This is useful if you only want your Samba server to + serve resources to users in the domain it is a member of. As + an example, suppose that there are two domains DOMA and DOMB. DOMB + is trusted by DOMA, which contains the Samba server. Under normal + circumstances, a user with an account in DOMB can then access the + resources of a UNIX account with the same account name on the + Samba server even if they do not have an account in DOMA. This + can make implementing a security boundary difficult.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>allow trusted domains = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ANNOUNCEAS" +></A +>announce as (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This specifies what type of server + <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +></A +> + will announce itself as, to a network neighborhood browse + list. By default this is set to Windows NT. The valid options + are : "NT Server" (which can also be written as "NT"), + "NT Workstation", "Win95" or "WfW" meaning Windows NT Server, + Windows NT Workstation, Windows 95 and Windows for Workgroups + respectively. Do not change this parameter unless you have a + specific need to stop Samba appearing as an NT server as this + may prevent Samba servers from participating as browser servers + correctly.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>announce as = NT Server</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>announce as = Win95</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ANNOUNCEVERSION" +></A +>announce version (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This specifies the major and minor version numbers + that nmbd will use when announcing itself as a server. The default + is 4.2. Do not change this parameter unless you have a specific + need to set a Samba server to be a downlevel server.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>announce version = 4.5</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>announce version = 2.0</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="AUTOSERVICES" +></A +>auto services (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a synonym for the <A +HREF="#PRELOAD" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preload</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="AUTHMETHODS" +></A +>auth methods (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows the administrator to chose what + authentication methods <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will use when authenticating + a user. This option defaults to sensible values based on <A +HREF="#SECURITY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> security</I +></TT +></A +>. + + Each entry in the list attempts to authenticate the user in turn, until + the user authenticates. In practice only one method will ever actually + be able to complete the authentication. + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>auth methods = <empty string></B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>auth methods = guest sam ntdomain</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="AVAILABLE" +></A +>available (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter lets you "turn off" a service. If + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>available = no</I +></TT +>, then <EM +>ALL</EM +> + attempts to connect to the service will fail. Such failures are + logged.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>available = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="BINDINTERFACESONLY" +></A +>bind interfaces only (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This global parameter allows the Samba admin + to limit what interfaces on a machine will serve SMB requests. If + affects file service <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> and + name service <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> in slightly + different ways.</P +><P +>For name service it causes <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> to bind + to ports 137 and 138 on the interfaces listed in the <A +HREF="#INTERFACES" +>interfaces</A +> parameter. <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd + </B +> also binds to the "all addresses" interface (0.0.0.0) + on ports 137 and 138 for the purposes of reading broadcast messages. + If this option is not set then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> will service + name requests on all of these sockets. If <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>bind interfaces + only</I +></TT +> is set then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> will check the + source address of any packets coming in on the broadcast sockets + and discard any that don't match the broadcast addresses of the + interfaces in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>interfaces</I +></TT +> parameter list. + As unicast packets are received on the other sockets it allows + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> to refuse to serve names to machines that + send packets that arrive through any interfaces not listed in the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>interfaces</I +></TT +> list. IP Source address spoofing + does defeat this simple check, however so it must not be used + seriously as a security feature for <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +>.</P +><P +>For file service it causes <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> + to bind only to the interface list given in the <A +HREF="#INTERFACES" +> interfaces</A +> parameter. This restricts the networks that + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will serve to packets coming in those + interfaces. Note that you should not use this parameter for machines + that are serving PPP or other intermittent or non-broadcast network + interfaces as it will not cope with non-permanent interfaces.</P +><P +>If <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>bind interfaces only</I +></TT +> is set then + unless the network address <EM +>127.0.0.1</EM +> is added + to the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>interfaces</I +></TT +> parameter list <A +HREF="smbpasswd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd(8)</B +></A +> + and <A +HREF="swat.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>swat(8)</B +></A +> may + not work as expected due to the reasons covered below.</P +><P +>To change a users SMB password, the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd</B +> + by default connects to the <EM +>localhost - 127.0.0.1</EM +> + address as an SMB client to issue the password change request. If + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>bind interfaces only</I +></TT +> is set then unless the + network address <EM +>127.0.0.1</EM +> is added to the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>interfaces</I +></TT +> parameter list then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> smbpasswd</B +> will fail to connect in it's default mode. + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd</B +> can be forced to use the primary IP interface + of the local host by using its <A +HREF="smbpasswd.8.html#minusr" +TARGET="_top" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>-r <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>remote machine</I +></TT +></I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter, with <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>remote machine</I +></TT +> set + to the IP name of the primary interface of the local host.</P +><P +>The <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>swat</B +> status page tries to connect with + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> and <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> at the address + <EM +>127.0.0.1</EM +> to determine if they are running. + Not adding <EM +>127.0.0.1</EM +> will cause <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> smbd</B +> and <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> to always show + "not running" even if they really are. This can prevent <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> swat</B +> from starting/stopping/restarting <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> + and <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>bind interfaces only = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="BLOCKINGLOCKS" +></A +>blocking locks (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter controls the behavior of <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> when given a request by a client + to obtain a byte range lock on a region of an open file, and the + request has a time limit associated with it.</P +><P +>If this parameter is set and the lock range requested + cannot be immediately satisfied, Samba 2.2 will internally + queue the lock request, and periodically attempt to obtain + the lock until the timeout period expires.</P +><P +>If this parameter is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +>, then + Samba 2.2 will behave as previous versions of Samba would and + will fail the lock request immediately if the lock range + cannot be obtained.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>blocking locks = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="BROWSABLE" +></A +>browsable (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>See the <A +HREF="#BROWSEABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> browseable</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="BROWSELIST" +></A +>browse list (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls whether <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +> will serve a browse list to + a client doing a <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>NetServerEnum</B +> call. Normally + set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>. You should never need to change + this.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>browse list = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="BROWSEABLE" +></A +>browseable (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls whether this share is seen in + the list of available shares in a net view and in the browse list.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>browseable = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="CASESENSITIVE" +></A +>case sensitive (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>See the discussion in the section <A +HREF="#AEN203" +>NAME MANGLING</A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>case sensitive = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="CASESIGNAMES" +></A +>casesignames (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#CASESENSITIVE" +>case + sensitive</A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="CHANGENOTIFYTIMEOUT" +></A +>change notify timeout (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This SMB allows a client to tell a server to + "watch" a particular directory for any changes and only reply to + the SMB request when a change has occurred. Such constant scanning of + a directory is expensive under UNIX, hence an <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +> daemon only performs such a scan + on each requested directory once every <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>change notify + timeout</I +></TT +> seconds.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>change notify timeout = 60</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>change notify timeout = 300</B +></P +><P +>Would change the scan time to every 5 minutes.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="CHANGESHARECOMMAND" +></A +>change share command (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically + add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>change share command</I +></TT +> is used to define an + external program or script which will modify an existing service definition + in <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +>. In order to successfully + execute the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>change share command</I +></TT +>, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> + requires that the administrator be connected using a root account (i.e. + uid == 0). + </P +><P +> When executed, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will automatically invoke the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>change share command</I +></TT +> with four parameters. + </P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>configFile</I +></TT +> - the location + of the global <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>shareName</I +></TT +> - the name of the new + share. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>pathName</I +></TT +> - path to an **existing** + directory on disk. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>comment</I +></TT +> - comment string to associate + with the new share. + </P +></LI +></UL +><P +> This parameter is only used modify existing file shares definitions. To modify + printer shares, use the "Printers..." folder as seen when browsing the Samba host. + </P +><P +> See also <A +HREF="#ADDSHARECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add share + command</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#DELETESHARECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete + share command</I +></TT +></A +>. + </P +><P +>Default: <EM +>none</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>change share command = /usr/local/bin/addshare</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="COMMENT" +></A +>comment (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a text field that is seen next to a share + when a client does a queries the server, either via the network + neighborhood or via <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>net view</B +> to list what shares + are available.</P +><P +>If you want to set the string that is displayed next to the + machine name then see the <A +HREF="#SERVERSTRING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> server string</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>No comment string</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>comment = Fred's Files</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="CONFIGFILE" +></A +>config file (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This allows you to override the config file + to use, instead of the default (usually <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +>). + There is a chicken and egg problem here as this option is set + in the config file!</P +><P +>For this reason, if the name of the config file has changed + when the parameters are loaded then it will reload them from + the new config file.</P +><P +>This option takes the usual substitutions, which can + be very useful.</P +><P +>If the config file doesn't exist then it won't be loaded + (allowing you to special case the config files of just a few + clients).</P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>config file = /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf.%m + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="COPY" +></A +>copy (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter allows you to "clone" service + entries. The specified service is simply duplicated under the + current service's name. Any parameters specified in the current + section will override those in the section being copied.</P +><P +>This feature lets you set up a 'template' service and + create similar services easily. Note that the service being + copied must occur earlier in the configuration file than the + service doing the copying.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>no value</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>copy = otherservice</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="CREATEMASK" +></A +>create mask (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>A synonym for this parameter is + <A +HREF="#CREATEMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mode</I +></TT +> + </A +>.</P +><P +>When a file is created, the necessary permissions are + calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX + permissions, and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed + with this parameter. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise + MASK for the UNIX modes of a file. Any bit <EM +>not</EM +> + set here will be removed from the modes set on a file when it is + created.</P +><P +>The default value of this parameter removes the + 'group' and 'other' write and execute bits from the UNIX modes.</P +><P +>Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode created + from this parameter with the value of the <A +HREF="#FORCECREATEMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force create mode</I +></TT +></A +> + parameter which is set to 000 by default.</P +><P +>This parameter does not affect directory modes. See the + parameter <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory mode + </I +></TT +></A +> for details.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#FORCECREATEMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force + create mode</I +></TT +></A +> parameter for forcing particular mode + bits to be set on created files. See also the <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYMODE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory mode</I +></TT +></A +> parameter for masking + mode bits on created directories. See also the <A +HREF="#INHERITPERMISSIONS" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>inherit permissions</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Note that this parameter does not apply to permissions + set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors. If the administrator wishes to enforce + a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the <A +HREF="#SECURITYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security mask</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>create mask = 0744</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>create mask = 0775</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="CREATEMODE" +></A +>create mode (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a synonym for <A +HREF="#CREATEMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> create mask</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DEADTIME" +></A +>deadtime (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The value of the parameter (a decimal integer) + represents the number of minutes of inactivity before a connection + is considered dead, and it is disconnected. The deadtime only takes + effect if the number of open files is zero.</P +><P +>This is useful to stop a server's resources being + exhausted by a large number of inactive connections.</P +><P +>Most clients have an auto-reconnect feature when a + connection is broken so in most cases this parameter should be + transparent to users.</P +><P +>Using this parameter with a timeout of a few minutes + is recommended for most systems.</P +><P +>A deadtime of zero indicates that no auto-disconnection + should be performed.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>deadtime = 0</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>deadtime = 15</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DEBUGHIRESTIMESTAMP" +></A +>debug hires timestamp (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Sometimes the timestamps in the log messages + are needed with a resolution of higher that seconds, this + boolean parameter adds microsecond resolution to the timestamp + message header when turned on.</P +><P +>Note that the parameter <A +HREF="#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> debug timestamp</I +></TT +></A +> must be on for this to have an + effect.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>debug hires timestamp = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DEBUGPID" +></A +>debug pid (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>When using only one log file for more then one + forked <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +>-process there may be hard to follow which process + outputs which message. This boolean parameter is adds the process-id + to the timestamp message headers in the logfile when turned on.</P +><P +>Note that the parameter <A +HREF="#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> debug timestamp</I +></TT +></A +> must be on for this to have an + effect.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>debug pid = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DEBUGTIMESTAMP" +></A +>debug timestamp (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Samba 2.2 debug log messages are timestamped + by default. If you are running at a high <A +HREF="#DEBUGLEVEL" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>debug level</I +></TT +></A +> these timestamps + can be distracting. This boolean parameter allows timestamping + to be turned off.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>debug timestamp = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DEBUGUID" +></A +>debug uid (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Samba is sometimes run as root and sometime + run as the connected user, this boolean parameter inserts the + current euid, egid, uid and gid to the timestamp message headers + in the log file if turned on.</P +><P +>Note that the parameter <A +HREF="#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> debug timestamp</I +></TT +></A +> must be on for this to have an + effect.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>debug uid = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DEBUGLEVEL" +></A +>debuglevel (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#LOGLEVEL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> log level</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DEFAULT" +></A +>default (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>A synonym for <A +HREF="#DEFAULTSERVICE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> default service</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DEFAULTCASE" +></A +>default case (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>See the section on <A +HREF="#AEN203" +> NAME MANGLING</A +>. Also note the <A +HREF="#SHORTPRESERVECASE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>short preserve case</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>default case = lower</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DEFAULTDEVMODE" +></A +>default devmode (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter is only applicable to <A +HREF="#PRINTOK" +>printable</A +> services. When smbd is serving + Printer Drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP clients, each printer on the Samba + server has a Device Mode which defines things such as paper size and + orientation and duplex settings. The device mode can only correctly be + generated by the printer driver itself (which can only be executed on a + Win32 platform). Because smbd is unable to execute the driver code + to generate the device mode, the default behavior is to set this field + to NULL. + </P +><P +>Most problems with serving printer drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP clients + can be traced to a problem with the generated device mode. Certain drivers + will do things such as crashing the client's Explorer.exe with a NULL devmode. + However, other printer drivers can cause the client's spooler service + (spoolsv.exe) to die if the devmode was not created by the driver itself + (i.e. smbd generates a default devmode). + </P +><P +>This parameter should be used with care and tested with the printer + driver in question. It is better to leave the device mode to NULL + and let the Windows client set the correct values. Because drivers do not + do this all the time, setting <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>default devmode = yes</B +> + will instruct smbd to generate a default one. + </P +><P +>For more information on Windows NT/2k printing and Device Modes, + see the <A +HREF="http://msdn.microsoft.com/" +TARGET="_top" +>MSDN documentation</A +>. + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>default devmode = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DEFAULTSERVICE" +></A +>default service (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the name of a service + which will be connected to if the service actually requested cannot + be found. Note that the square brackets are <EM +>NOT</EM +> + given in the parameter value (see example below).</P +><P +>There is no default value for this parameter. If this + parameter is not given, attempting to connect to a nonexistent + service results in an error.</P +><P +>Typically the default service would be a <A +HREF="#GUESTOK" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest ok</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#READONLY" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>read-only</I +></TT +></A +> service.</P +><P +>Also note that the apparent service name will be changed + to equal that of the requested service, this is very useful as it + allows you to use macros like <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%S</I +></TT +> to make + a wildcard service.</P +><P +>Note also that any "_" characters in the name of the service + used in the default service will get mapped to a "/". This allows for + interesting things.</P +><P +>Example:</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>[global] + default service = pub + +[pub] + path = /%S + </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND" +></A +>delete printer command (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printer + support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, it is now + possible to delete printer at run time by issuing the + DeletePrinter() RPC call.</P +><P +>For a Samba host this means that the printer must be + physically deleted from underlying printing system. The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> deleteprinter command</I +></TT +> defines a script to be run which + will perform the necessary operations for removing the printer + from the print system and from <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +>. + </P +><P +>The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete printer command</I +></TT +> is + automatically called with only one parameter: <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> "printer name"</I +></TT +>.</P +><P +>Once the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete printer command</I +></TT +> has + been executed, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will reparse the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +> smb.conf</TT +> to associated printer no longer exists. + If the sharename is still valid, then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd + </B +> will return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> add printer command</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#PRINTING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing</I +></TT +></A +>, + <A +HREF="#SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>show add + printer wizard</I +></TT +></A +></P +><P +>Default: <EM +>none</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>deleteprinter command = /usr/bin/removeprinter + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DELETEREADONLY" +></A +>delete readonly (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter allows readonly files to be deleted. + This is not normal DOS semantics, but is allowed by UNIX.</P +><P +>This option may be useful for running applications such + as rcs, where UNIX file ownership prevents changing file + permissions, and DOS semantics prevent deletion of a read only file.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>delete readonly = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DELETESHARECOMMAND" +></A +>delete share command (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically + add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete share command</I +></TT +> is used to define an + external program or script which will remove an existing service + definition from <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +>. In order to successfully + execute the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete share command</I +></TT +>, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> + requires that the administrator be connected using a root account (i.e. + uid == 0). + </P +><P +> When executed, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will automatically invoke the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete share command</I +></TT +> with two parameters. + </P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>configFile</I +></TT +> - the location + of the global <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>shareName</I +></TT +> - the name of + the existing service. + </P +></LI +></UL +><P +> This parameter is only used to remove file shares. To delete printer shares, + see the <A +HREF="#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete printer + command</I +></TT +></A +>. + </P +><P +> See also <A +HREF="#ADDSHARECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add share + command</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#CHANGESHARECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>change + share command</I +></TT +></A +>. + </P +><P +>Default: <EM +>none</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>delete share command = /usr/local/bin/delshare</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DELETEUSERSCRIPT" +></A +>delete user script (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is the full pathname to a script that will + be run <EM +>AS ROOT</EM +> by <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +> under special circumstances + described below.</P +><P +>Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are + created for all users accessing files on this server. For sites + that use Windows NT account databases as their primary user database + creating these users and keeping the user list in sync with the + Windows NT PDC is an onerous task. This option allows <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> smbd</B +> to delete the required UNIX users <EM +>ON + DEMAND</EM +> when a user accesses the Samba server and the + Windows NT user no longer exists.</P +><P +>In order to use this option, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> must be + set to <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security = domain</I +></TT +> or <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security = + user</I +></TT +> and <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete user script</I +></TT +> + must be set to a full pathname for a script + that will delete a UNIX user given one argument of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%u</I +></TT +>, + which expands into the UNIX user name to delete.</P +><P +>When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server, + at <EM +>login</EM +> (session setup in the SMB protocol) + time, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> contacts the <A +HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password server</I +></TT +></A +> and attempts to authenticate + the given user with the given password. If the authentication fails + with the specific Domain error code meaning that the user no longer + exists then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> attempts to find a UNIX user in + the UNIX password database that matches the Windows user account. If + this lookup succeeds, and <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete user script</I +></TT +> is + set then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will all the specified script + <EM +>AS ROOT</EM +>, expanding any <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%u</I +></TT +> + argument to be the user name to delete.</P +><P +>This script should delete the given UNIX username. In this way, + UNIX users are dynamically deleted to match existing Windows NT + accounts.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN" +>security = domain</A +>, + <A +HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password server</I +></TT +> + </A +>, <A +HREF="#ADDUSERSCRIPT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add user script</I +></TT +> + </A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>delete user script = <empty string> + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>delete user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/del_user + %u</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DELETEVETOFILES" +></A +>delete veto files (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option is used when Samba is attempting to + delete a directory that contains one or more vetoed directories + (see the <A +HREF="#VETOFILES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>veto files</I +></TT +></A +> + option). If this option is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +> (the default) then if a vetoed + directory contains any non-vetoed files or directories then the + directory delete will fail. This is usually what you want.</P +><P +>If this option is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>, then Samba + will attempt to recursively delete any files and directories within + the vetoed directory. This can be useful for integration with file + serving systems such as NetAtalk which create meta-files within + directories you might normally veto DOS/Windows users from seeing + (e.g. <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>.AppleDouble</TT +>)</P +><P +>Setting <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>delete veto files = yes</B +> allows these + directories to be transparently deleted when the parent directory + is deleted (so long as the user has permissions to do so).</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#VETOFILES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>veto + files</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>delete veto files = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DENYHOSTS" +></A +>deny hosts (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#HOSTSDENY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts + deny</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DFREECOMMAND" +></A +>dfree command (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>dfree command</I +></TT +> setting should + only be used on systems where a problem occurs with the internal + disk space calculations. This has been known to happen with Ultrix, + but may occur with other operating systems. The symptom that was + seen was an error of "Abort Retry Ignore" at the end of each + directory listing.</P +><P +>This setting allows the replacement of the internal routines to + calculate the total disk space and amount available with an external + routine. The example below gives a possible script that might fulfill + this function.</P +><P +>The external program will be passed a single parameter indicating + a directory in the filesystem being queried. This will typically consist + of the string <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>./</TT +>. The script should return two + integers in ASCII. The first should be the total disk space in blocks, + and the second should be the number of available blocks. An optional + third return value can give the block size in bytes. The default + blocksize is 1024 bytes.</P +><P +>Note: Your script should <EM +>NOT</EM +> be setuid or + setgid and should be owned by (and writeable only by) root!</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>By default internal routines for + determining the disk capacity and remaining space will be used. + </EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>dfree command = /usr/local/samba/bin/dfree + </B +></P +><P +>Where the script dfree (which must be made executable) could be:</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> + #!/bin/sh + df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' + </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +><P +>or perhaps (on Sys V based systems):</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> + #!/bin/sh + /usr/bin/df -k $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $3" "$5}' + </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +><P +>Note that you may have to replace the command names + with full path names on some systems.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DIRECTORY" +></A +>directory (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#PATH" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>path + </I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DIRECTORYMASK" +></A +>directory mask (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter is the octal modes which are + used when converting DOS modes to UNIX modes when creating UNIX + directories.</P +><P +>When a directory is created, the necessary permissions are + calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, + and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed with this + parameter. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise MASK for + the UNIX modes of a directory. Any bit <EM +>not</EM +> set + here will be removed from the modes set on a directory when it is + created.</P +><P +>The default value of this parameter removes the 'group' + and 'other' write bits from the UNIX mode, allowing only the + user who owns the directory to modify it.</P +><P +>Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode + created from this parameter with the value of the <A +HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory mode + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter. This parameter is set to 000 by + default (i.e. no extra mode bits are added).</P +><P +>Note that this parameter does not apply to permissions + set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors. If the administrator wishes to enforce + a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory security mask</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>See the <A +HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force + directory mode</I +></TT +></A +> parameter to cause particular mode + bits to always be set on created directories.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#CREATEMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mode + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter for masking mode bits on created files, + and the <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory + security mask</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Also refer to the <A +HREF="#INHERITPERMISSIONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> inherit permissions</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>directory mask = 0755</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>directory mask = 0775</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DIRECTORYMODE" +></A +>directory mode (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> directory mask</I +></TT +></A +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK" +></A +>directory security mask (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits + can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX + permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog + box.</P +><P +>This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to + the changed permission bits, thus preventing any bits not in + this mask from being modified. Essentially, zero bits in this + mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed + to change.</P +><P +>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to 0777 + meaning a user is allowed to modify all the user/group/world + permissions on a directory.</P +><P +><EM +>Note</EM +> that users who can access the + Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, + so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems. + Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave + it as the default of <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>0777</TT +>.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> force directory security mode</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#SECURITYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security mask</I +></TT +></A +>, + <A +HREF="#FORCESECURITYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force security mode + </I +></TT +></A +> parameters.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>directory security mask = 0777</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>directory security mask = 0700</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DISABLESPOOLSS" +></A +>disable spoolss (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Enabling this parameter will disables Samba's support + for the SPOOLSS set of MS-RPC's and will yield identical behavior + as Samba 2.0.x. Windows NT/2000 clients will downgrade to using + Lanman style printing commands. Windows 9x/ME will be uneffected by + the parameter. However, this will also disable the ability to upload + printer drivers to a Samba server via the Windows NT Add Printer + Wizard or by using the NT printer properties dialog window. It will + also disable the capability of Windows NT/2000 clients to download + print drivers from the Samba host upon demand. + <EM +>Be very careful about enabling this parameter.</EM +> + </P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#USECLIENTDRIVER" +>use client driver</A +> + </P +><P +>Default : <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>disable spoolss = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DNSPROXY" +></A +>dns proxy (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Specifies that <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> + when acting as a WINS server and finding that a NetBIOS name has not + been registered, should treat the NetBIOS name word-for-word as a DNS + name and do a lookup with the DNS server for that name on behalf of + the name-querying client.</P +><P +>Note that the maximum length for a NetBIOS name is 15 + characters, so the DNS name (or DNS alias) can likewise only be + 15 characters, maximum.</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> spawns a second copy of itself to do the + DNS name lookup requests, as doing a name lookup is a blocking + action.</P +><P +>See also the parameter <A +HREF="#WINSSUPPORT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> wins support</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>dns proxy = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DOMAINADMINGROUP" +></A +>domain admin group (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter is intended as a temporary solution + to enable users to be a member of the "Domain Admins" group when + a Samba host is acting as a PDC. A complete solution will be provided + by a system for mapping Windows NT/2000 groups onto UNIX groups. + Please note that this parameter has a somewhat confusing name. It + accepts a list of usernames and of group names in standard + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> notation. + </P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#DOMAINGUESTGROUP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain + guest group</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#DOMAINLOGONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain + logons</I +></TT +></A +> + </P +><P +>Default: <EM +>no domain administrators</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>domain admin group = root @wheel</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DOMAINGUESTGROUP" +></A +>domain guest group (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter is intended as a temporary solution + to enable users to be a member of the "Domain Guests" group when + a Samba host is acting as a PDC. A complete solution will be provided + by a system for mapping Windows NT/2000 groups onto UNIX groups. + Please note that this parameter has a somewhat confusing name. It + accepts a list of usernames and of group names in standard + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> notation. + </P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#DOMAINADMINGROUP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain + admin group</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#DOMAINLOGONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain + logons</I +></TT +></A +> + </P +><P +>Default: <EM +>no domain guests</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>domain guest group = nobody @guest</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DOMAINLOGONS" +></A +>domain logons (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>If set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>, the Samba server will serve + Windows 95/98 Domain logons for the <A +HREF="#WORKGROUP" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>workgroup</I +></TT +></A +> it is in. Samba 2.2 also + has limited capability to act as a domain controller for Windows + NT 4 Domains. For more details on setting up this feature see + the Samba-PDC-HOWTO included in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>htmldocs/</TT +> + directory shipped with the source code.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>domain logons = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DOMAINMASTER" +></A +>domain master (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Tell <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> nmbd(8)</B +></A +> to enable WAN-wide browse list + collation. Setting this option causes <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> to + claim a special domain specific NetBIOS name that identifies + it as a domain master browser for its given <A +HREF="#WORKGROUP" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>workgroup</I +></TT +></A +>. Local master browsers + in the same <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>workgroup</I +></TT +> on broadcast-isolated + subnets will give this <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> their local browse lists, + and then ask <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +> + for a complete copy of the browse list for the whole wide area + network. Browser clients will then contact their local master browser, + and will receive the domain-wide browse list, instead of just the list + for their broadcast-isolated subnet.</P +><P +>Note that Windows NT Primary Domain Controllers expect to be + able to claim this <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>workgroup</I +></TT +> specific special + NetBIOS name that identifies them as domain master browsers for + that <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>workgroup</I +></TT +> by default (i.e. there is no + way to prevent a Windows NT PDC from attempting to do this). This + means that if this parameter is set and <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> claims + the special name for a <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>workgroup</I +></TT +> before a Windows + NT PDC is able to do so then cross subnet browsing will behave + strangely and may fail.</P +><P +>If <A +HREF="#DOMAINLOGONS" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>domain logons = yes</B +> + </A +>, then the default behavior is to enable the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain + master</I +></TT +> parameter. If <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain logons</I +></TT +> is + not enabled (the default setting), then neither will <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain + master</I +></TT +> be enabled by default.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>domain master = auto</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DONTDESCEND" +></A +>dont descend (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>There are certain directories on some systems + (e.g., the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/proc</TT +> tree under Linux) that are either not + of interest to clients or are infinitely deep (recursive). This + parameter allows you to specify a comma-delimited list of directories + that the server should always show as empty.</P +><P +>Note that Samba can be very fussy about the exact format + of the "dont descend" entries. For example you may need <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +> ./proc</TT +> instead of just <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/proc</TT +>. + Experimentation is the best policy :-) </P +><P +>Default: <EM +>none (i.e., all directories are OK + to descend)</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>dont descend = /proc,/dev</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DOSFILEMODE" +></A +>dos filemode (S)</DT +><DD +><P +> The default behavior in Samba is to provide + UNIX-like behavior where only the owner of a file/directory is + able to change the permissions on it. However, this behavior + is often confusing to DOS/Windows users. Enabling this parameter + allows a user who has write access to the file (by whatever + means) to modify the permissions on it. Note that a user + belonging to the group owning the file will not be allowed to + change permissions if the group is only granted read access. + Ownership of the file/directory is not changed, only the permissions + are modified.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>dos filemode = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DOSFILETIMERESOLUTION" +></A +>dos filetime resolution (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Under the DOS and Windows FAT filesystem, the finest + granularity on time resolution is two seconds. Setting this parameter + for a share causes Samba to round the reported time down to the + nearest two second boundary when a query call that requires one second + resolution is made to <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +> + </A +>.</P +><P +>This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for Visual + C++ when used against Samba shares. If oplocks are enabled on a + share, Visual C++ uses two different time reading calls to check if a + file has changed since it was last read. One of these calls uses a + one-second granularity, the other uses a two second granularity. As + the two second call rounds any odd second down, then if the file has a + timestamp of an odd number of seconds then the two timestamps will not + match and Visual C++ will keep reporting the file has changed. Setting + this option causes the two timestamps to match, and Visual C++ is + happy.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>dos filetime resolution = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DOSFILETIMES" +></A +>dos filetimes (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Under DOS and Windows, if a user can write to a + file they can change the timestamp on it. Under POSIX semantics, + only the owner of the file or root may change the timestamp. By + default, Samba runs with POSIX semantics and refuses to change the + timestamp on a file if the user <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> is acting + on behalf of is not the file owner. Setting this option to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +> true</TT +> allows DOS semantics and <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> will change the file + timestamp as DOS requires.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>dos filetimes = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" +></A +>encrypt passwords (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean controls whether encrypted passwords + will be negotiated with the client. Note that Windows NT 4.0 SP3 and + above and also Windows 98 will by default expect encrypted passwords + unless a registry entry is changed. To use encrypted passwords in + Samba see the file ENCRYPTION.txt in the Samba documentation + directory <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>docs/</TT +> shipped with the source code.</P +><P +>In order for encrypted passwords to work correctly + <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +> must either + have access to a local <A +HREF="smbpasswd.5.html" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smbpasswd(5) + </TT +></A +> file (see the <A +HREF="smbpasswd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> smbpasswd(8)</B +></A +> program for information on how to set up + and maintain this file), or set the <A +HREF="#SECURITY" +>security = [server|domain|ads]</A +> parameter which + causes <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> to authenticate against another + server.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>encrypt passwords = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ENHANCEDBROWSING" +></A +>enhanced browsing (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option enables a couple of enhancements to + cross-subnet browse propagation that have been added in Samba + but which are not standard in Microsoft implementations. + </P +><P +>The first enhancement to browse propagation consists of a regular + wildcard query to a Samba WINS server for all Domain Master Browsers, + followed by a browse synchronization with each of the returned + DMBs. The second enhancement consists of a regular randomised browse + synchronization with all currently known DMBs.</P +><P +>You may wish to disable this option if you have a problem with empty + workgroups not disappearing from browse lists. Due to the restrictions + of the browse protocols these enhancements can cause a empty workgroup + to stay around forever which can be annoying.</P +><P +>In general you should leave this option enabled as it makes + cross-subnet browse propagation much more reliable.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>enhanced browsing = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ENUMPORTSCOMMAND" +></A +>enumports command (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The concept of a "port" is fairly foreign + to UNIX hosts. Under Windows NT/2000 print servers, a port + is associated with a port monitor and generally takes the form of + a local port (i.e. LPT1:, COM1:, FILE:) or a remote port + (i.e. LPD Port Monitor, etc...). By default, Samba has only one + port defined--<TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>"Samba Printer Port"</TT +>. Under + Windows NT/2000, all printers must have a valid port name. + If you wish to have a list of ports displayed (<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd + </B +> does not use a port name for anything) other than + the default <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>"Samba Printer Port"</TT +>, you + can define <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>enumports command</I +></TT +> to point to + a program which should generate a list of ports, one per line, + to standard output. This listing will then be used in response + to the level 1 and 2 EnumPorts() RPC.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>no enumports command</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>enumports command = /usr/bin/listports + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="EXEC" +></A +>exec (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a synonym for <A +HREF="#PREEXEC" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preexec</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="FAKEDIRECTORYCREATETIMES" +></A +>fake directory create times (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>NTFS and Windows VFAT file systems keep a create + time for all files and directories. This is not the same as the + ctime - status change time - that Unix keeps, so Samba by default + reports the earliest of the various times Unix does keep. Setting + this parameter for a share causes Samba to always report midnight + 1-1-1980 as the create time for directories.</P +><P +>This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for + Visual C++ when used against Samba shares. Visual C++ generated + makefiles have the object directory as a dependency for each object + file, and a make rule to create the directory. Also, when NMAKE + compares timestamps it uses the creation time when examining a + directory. Thus the object directory will be created if it does not + exist, but once it does exist it will always have an earlier + timestamp than the object files it contains.</P +><P +>However, Unix time semantics mean that the create time + reported by Samba will be updated whenever a file is created or + or deleted in the directory. NMAKE finds all object files in + the object directory. The timestamp of the last one built is then + compared to the timestamp of the object directory. If the + directory's timestamp if newer, then all object files + will be rebuilt. Enabling this option + ensures directories always predate their contents and an NMAKE build + will proceed as expected.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>fake directory create times = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="FAKEOPLOCKS" +></A +>fake oplocks (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission + from a server to locally cache file operations. If a server grants + an oplock (opportunistic lock) then the client is free to assume + that it is the only one accessing the file and it will aggressively + cache file data. With some oplock types the client may even cache + file open/close operations. This can give enormous performance benefits. + </P +><P +>When you set <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>fake oplocks = yes</B +>, <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +> will + always grant oplock requests no matter how many clients are using + the file.</P +><P +>It is generally much better to use the real <A +HREF="#OPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>oplocks</I +></TT +></A +> support rather + than this parameter.</P +><P +>If you enable this option on all read-only shares or + shares that you know will only be accessed from one client at a + time such as physically read-only media like CDROMs, you will see + a big performance improvement on many operations. If you enable + this option on shares where multiple clients may be accessing the + files read-write at the same time you can get data corruption. Use + this option carefully!</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>fake oplocks = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="FOLLOWSYMLINKS" +></A +>follow symlinks (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter allows the Samba administrator + to stop <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +> + from following symbolic links in a particular share. Setting this + parameter to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +> prevents any file or directory + that is a symbolic link from being followed (the user will get an + error). This option is very useful to stop users from adding a + symbolic link to <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd</TT +> in their home + directory for instance. However it will slow filename lookups + down slightly.</P +><P +>This option is enabled (i.e. <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will + follow symbolic links) by default.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>follow symlinks = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="FORCECREATEMODE" +></A +>force create mode (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit + permissions that will <EM +>always</EM +> be set on a + file created by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto + the mode bits of a file that is being created or having its + permissions changed. The default for this parameter is (in octal) + 000. The modes in this parameter are bitwise 'OR'ed onto the file + mode after the mask set in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask</I +></TT +> + parameter is applied.</P +><P +>See also the parameter <A +HREF="#CREATEMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create + mask</I +></TT +></A +> for details on masking mode bits on files.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#INHERITPERMISSIONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>inherit + permissions</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>force create mode = 000</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>force create mode = 0755</B +></P +><P +>would force all created files to have read and execute + permissions set for 'group' and 'other' as well as the + read/write/execute bits set for the 'user'.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" +></A +>force directory mode (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit + permissions that will <EM +>always</EM +> be set on a directory + created by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto the + mode bits of a directory that is being created. The default for this + parameter is (in octal) 0000 which will not add any extra permission + bits to a created directory. This operation is done after the mode + mask in the parameter <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory mask</I +></TT +> is + applied.</P +><P +>See also the parameter <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> directory mask</I +></TT +></A +> for details on masking mode bits + on created directories.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#INHERITPERMISSIONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> inherit permissions</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>force directory mode = 000</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>force directory mode = 0755</B +></P +><P +>would force all created directories to have read and execute + permissions set for 'group' and 'other' as well as the + read/write/execute bits set for the 'user'.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE" +></A +>force directory + security mode (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits + can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX + permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog box.</P +><P +>This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the + changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this mask that + the user may have modified to be on. Essentially, one bits in this + mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security + on a directory, the user has always set to be 'on'.</P +><P +>If not set explicitly this parameter is 000, which + allows a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a + directory without restrictions.</P +><P +><EM +>Note</EM +> that users who can access the + Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, + so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems. + Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave + it set as 0000.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> directory security mask</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#SECURITYMASK" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security mask</I +></TT +></A +>, + <A +HREF="#FORCESECURITYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force security mode + </I +></TT +></A +> parameters.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>force directory security mode = 0</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>force directory security mode = 700</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="FORCEGROUP" +></A +>force group (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This specifies a UNIX group name that will be + assigned as the default primary group for all users connecting + to this service. This is useful for sharing files by ensuring + that all access to files on service will use the named group for + their permissions checking. Thus, by assigning permissions for this + group to the files and directories within this service the Samba + administrator can restrict or allow sharing of these files.</P +><P +>In Samba 2.0.5 and above this parameter has extended + functionality in the following way. If the group name listed here + has a '+' character prepended to it then the current user accessing + the share only has the primary group default assigned to this group + if they are already assigned as a member of that group. This allows + an administrator to decide that only users who are already in a + particular group will create files with group ownership set to that + group. This gives a finer granularity of ownership assignment. For + example, the setting <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>force group = +sys</TT +> means + that only users who are already in group sys will have their default + primary group assigned to sys when accessing this Samba share. All + other users will retain their ordinary primary group.</P +><P +>If the <A +HREF="#FORCEUSER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force user + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter is also set the group specified in + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force group</I +></TT +> will override the primary group + set in <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force user</I +></TT +>.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#FORCEUSER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force + user</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>no forced group</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>force group = agroup</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="FORCESECURITYMODE" +></A +>force security mode (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter controls what UNIX permission + bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating + the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog + box.</P +><P +>This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the + changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this mask that + the user may have modified to be on. Essentially, one bits in this + mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security + on a file, the user has always set to be 'on'.</P +><P +>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to 0, + and allows a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file, + with no restrictions.</P +><P +><EM +>Note</EM +> that users who can access + the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, + so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems. + Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave + this set to 0000.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> force directory security mode</I +></TT +></A +>, + <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory security + mask</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#SECURITYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> security mask</I +></TT +></A +> parameters.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>force security mode = 0</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>force security mode = 700</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="FORCEUSER" +></A +>force user (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This specifies a UNIX user name that will be + assigned as the default user for all users connecting to this service. + This is useful for sharing files. You should also use it carefully + as using it incorrectly can cause security problems.</P +><P +>This user name only gets used once a connection is established. + Thus clients still need to connect as a valid user and supply a + valid password. Once connected, all file operations will be performed + as the "forced user", no matter what username the client connected + as. This can be very useful.</P +><P +>In Samba 2.0.5 and above this parameter also causes the + primary group of the forced user to be used as the primary group + for all file activity. Prior to 2.0.5 the primary group was left + as the primary group of the connecting user (this was a bug).</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#FORCEGROUP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force group + </I +></TT +></A +></P +><P +>Default: <EM +>no forced user</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>force user = auser</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="FSTYPE" +></A +>fstype (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter allows the administrator to + configure the string that specifies the type of filesystem a share + is using that is reported by <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8) + </B +></A +> when a client queries the filesystem type + for a share. The default type is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>NTFS</TT +> for + compatibility with Windows NT but this can be changed to other + strings such as <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>Samba</TT +> or <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>FAT + </TT +> if required.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>fstype = NTFS</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>fstype = Samba</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="GETWDCACHE" +></A +>getwd cache (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a tuning option. When this is enabled a + caching algorithm will be used to reduce the time taken for getwd() + calls. This can have a significant impact on performance, especially + when the <A +HREF="#WIDELINKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>wide links</I +></TT +> + </A +>parameter is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>getwd cache = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="GROUP" +></A +>group (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#FORCEGROUP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force + group</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="GUESTACCOUNT" +></A +>guest account (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a username which will be used for access + to services which are specified as <A +HREF="#GUESTOK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> guest ok</I +></TT +></A +> (see below). Whatever privileges this + user has will be available to any client connecting to the guest service. + Typically this user will exist in the password file, but will not + have a valid login. The user account "ftp" is often a good choice + for this parameter. If a username is specified in a given service, + the specified username overrides this one.</P +><P +>One some systems the default guest account "nobody" may not + be able to print. Use another account in this case. You should test + this by trying to log in as your guest user (perhaps by using the + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>su -</B +> command) and trying to print using the + system print command such as <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpr(1)</B +> or <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> lp(1)</B +>.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>specified at compile time, usually + "nobody"</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>guest account = ftp</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="GUESTOK" +></A +>guest ok (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>If this parameter is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +> for + a service, then no password is required to connect to the service. + Privileges will be those of the <A +HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> guest account</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>See the section below on <A +HREF="#SECURITY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> security</I +></TT +></A +> for more information about this option. + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>guest ok = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="GUESTONLY" +></A +>guest only (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>If this parameter is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +> for + a service, then only guest connections to the service are permitted. + This parameter will have no effect if <A +HREF="#GUESTOK" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest ok</I +></TT +></A +> is not set for the service.</P +><P +>See the section below on <A +HREF="#SECURITY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> security</I +></TT +></A +> for more information about this option. + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>guest only = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="HIDEDOTFILES" +></A +>hide dot files (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a boolean parameter that controls whether + files starting with a dot appear as hidden files.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hide dot files = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="HIDEFILES" +></A +>hide files(S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a list of files or directories that are not + visible but are accessible. The DOS 'hidden' attribute is applied + to any files or directories that match.</P +><P +>Each entry in the list must be separated by a '/', + which allows spaces to be included in the entry. '*' + and '?' can be used to specify multiple files or directories + as in DOS wildcards.</P +><P +>Each entry must be a Unix path, not a DOS path and must + not include the Unix directory separator '/'.</P +><P +>Note that the case sensitivity option is applicable + in hiding files.</P +><P +>Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba, + as it will be forced to check all files and directories for a match + as they are scanned.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#HIDEDOTFILES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hide + dot files</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#VETOFILES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> veto files</I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#CASESENSITIVE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>case sensitive</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>no file are hidden</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hide files = + /.*/DesktopFolderDB/TrashFor%m/resource.frk/</B +></P +><P +>The above example is based on files that the Macintosh + SMB client (DAVE) available from <A +HREF="http://www.thursby.com" +TARGET="_top" +> + Thursby</A +> creates for internal use, and also still hides + all files beginning with a dot.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="HIDELOCALUSERS" +></A +>hide local users(G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter toggles the hiding of local UNIX + users (root, wheel, floppy, etc) from remote clients.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hide local users = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="HIDEUNREADABLE" +></A +>hide unreadable (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter prevents clients from seeing the + existance of files that cannot be read. Defaults to off.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hide unreadable = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="HOMEDIRMAP" +></A +>homedir map (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>If<A +HREF="#NISHOMEDIR" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>nis homedir + </I +></TT +></A +> is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>, and <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +> is also acting + as a Win95/98 <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>logon server</I +></TT +> then this parameter + specifies the NIS (or YP) map from which the server for the user's + home directory should be extracted. At present, only the Sun + auto.home map format is understood. The form of the map is:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>username server:/some/file/system</B +></P +><P +>and the program will extract the servername from before + the first ':'. There should probably be a better parsing system + that copes with different map formats and also Amd (another + automounter) maps.</P +><P +><EM +>NOTE :</EM +>A working NIS client is required on + the system for this option to work.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#NISHOMEDIR" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>nis homedir</I +></TT +> + </A +>, <A +HREF="#DOMAINLOGONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain logons</I +></TT +> + </A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>homedir map = <empty string></B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>homedir map = amd.homedir</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="HOSTMSDFS" +></A +>host msdfs (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter is only available + if Samba has been configured and compiled with the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> --with-msdfs</B +> option. If set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +>, + Samba will act as a Dfs server, and allow Dfs-aware clients + to browse Dfs trees hosted on the server.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#MSDFSROOT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> msdfs root</I +></TT +></A +> share level parameter. For + more information on setting up a Dfs tree on Samba, + refer to <A +HREF="msdfs_setup.html" +TARGET="_top" +>msdfs_setup.html</A +>. + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>host msdfs = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="HOSTSALLOW" +></A +>hosts allow (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>A synonym for this parameter is <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>allow + hosts</I +></TT +>.</P +><P +>This parameter is a comma, space, or tab delimited + set of hosts which are permitted to access a service.</P +><P +>If specified in the [global] section then it will + apply to all services, regardless of whether the individual + service has a different setting.</P +><P +>You can specify the hosts by name or IP number. For + example, you could restrict access to only the hosts on a + Class C subnet with something like <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>allow hosts = 150.203.5. + </B +>. The full syntax of the list is described in the man + page <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>hosts_access(5)</TT +>. Note that this man + page may not be present on your system, so a brief description will + be given here also.</P +><P +>Note that the localhost address 127.0.0.1 will always + be allowed access unless specifically denied by a <A +HREF="#HOSTSDENY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts deny</I +></TT +></A +> option.</P +><P +>You can also specify hosts by network/netmask pairs and + by netgroup names if your system supports netgroups. The + <EM +>EXCEPT</EM +> keyword can also be used to limit a + wildcard list. The following examples may provide some help:</P +><P +>Example 1: allow all IPs in 150.203.*.*; except one</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hosts allow = 150.203. EXCEPT 150.203.6.66</B +></P +><P +>Example 2: allow hosts that match the given network/netmask</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hosts allow = 150.203.15.0/255.255.255.0</B +></P +><P +>Example 3: allow a couple of hosts</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hosts allow = lapland, arvidsjaur</B +></P +><P +>Example 4: allow only hosts in NIS netgroup "foonet", but + deny access from one particular host</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hosts allow = @foonet</B +></P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hosts deny = pirate</B +></P +><P +>Note that access still requires suitable user-level passwords.</P +><P +>See <A +HREF="testparm.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>testparm(1)</B +> + </A +> for a way of testing your host access to see if it does + what you expect.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>none (i.e., all hosts permitted access) + </EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>allow hosts = 150.203.5. myhost.mynet.edu.au + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="HOSTSDENY" +></A +>hosts deny (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>The opposite of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts allow</I +></TT +> + - hosts listed here are <EM +>NOT</EM +> permitted access to + services unless the specific services have their own lists to override + this one. Where the lists conflict, the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>allow</I +></TT +> + list takes precedence.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>none (i.e., no hosts specifically excluded) + </EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hosts deny = 150.203.4. badhost.mynet.edu.au + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="HOSTSEQUIV" +></A +>hosts equiv (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>If this global parameter is a non-null string, + it specifies the name of a file to read for the names of hosts + and users who will be allowed access without specifying a password. + </P +><P +>This is not be confused with <A +HREF="#HOSTSALLOW" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts allow</I +></TT +></A +> which is about hosts + access to services and is more useful for guest services. <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> hosts equiv</I +></TT +> may be useful for NT clients which will + not supply passwords to Samba.</P +><P +><EM +>NOTE :</EM +> The use of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts equiv + </I +></TT +> can be a major security hole. This is because you are + trusting the PC to supply the correct username. It is very easy to + get a PC to supply a false username. I recommend that the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts equiv</I +></TT +> option be only used if you really + know what you are doing, or perhaps on a home network where you trust + your spouse and kids. And only if you <EM +>really</EM +> trust + them :-).</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>no host equivalences</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hosts equiv = /etc/hosts.equiv</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="INCLUDE" +></A +>include (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This allows you to include one config file + inside another. The file is included literally, as though typed + in place.</P +><P +>It takes the standard substitutions, except <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%u + </I +></TT +>, <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%P</I +></TT +> and <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%S</I +></TT +>. + </P +><P +>Default: <EM +>no file included</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>include = /usr/local/samba/lib/admin_smb.conf + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="INHERITPERMISSIONS" +></A +>inherit permissions (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>The permissions on new files and directories + are normally governed by <A +HREF="#CREATEMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> create mask</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYMASK" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory mask</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#FORCECREATEMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force create mode</I +></TT +> + </A +> and <A +HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force + directory mode</I +></TT +></A +> but the boolean inherit + permissions parameter overrides this.</P +><P +>New directories inherit the mode of the parent directory, + including bits such as setgid.</P +><P +>New files inherit their read/write bits from the parent + directory. Their execute bits continue to be determined by + <A +HREF="#MAPARCHIVE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map archive</I +></TT +> + </A +>, <A +HREF="#MAPHIDDEN" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map hidden</I +></TT +> + </A +> and <A +HREF="#MAPSYSTEM" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map system</I +></TT +> + </A +> as usual.</P +><P +>Note that the setuid bit is <EM +>never</EM +> set via + inheritance (the code explicitly prohibits this).</P +><P +>This can be particularly useful on large systems with + many users, perhaps several thousand, to allow a single [homes] + share to be used flexibly by each user.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#CREATEMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask + </I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> directory mask</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#FORCECREATEMODE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force create mode</I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory mode</I +></TT +> + </A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>inherit permissions = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="INTERFACES" +></A +>interfaces (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows you to override the default + network interfaces list that Samba will use for browsing, name + registration and other NBT traffic. By default Samba will query + the kernel for the list of all active interfaces and use any + interfaces except 127.0.0.1 that are broadcast capable.</P +><P +>The option takes a list of interface strings. Each string + can be in any of the following forms:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>a network interface name (such as eth0). + This may include shell-like wildcards so eth* will match + any interface starting with the substring "eth"</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>an IP address. In this case the netmask is + determined from the list of interfaces obtained from the + kernel</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>an IP/mask pair. </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>a broadcast/mask pair.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>The "mask" parameters can either be a bit length (such + as 24 for a C class network) or a full netmask in dotted + decimal form.</P +><P +>The "IP" parameters above can either be a full dotted + decimal IP address or a hostname which will be looked up via + the OS's normal hostname resolution mechanisms.</P +><P +>For example, the following line:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>interfaces = eth0 192.168.2.10/24 192.168.3.10/255.255.255.0 + </B +></P +><P +>would configure three network interfaces corresponding + to the eth0 device and IP addresses 192.168.2.10 and 192.168.3.10. + The netmasks of the latter two interfaces would be set to 255.255.255.0.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#BINDINTERFACESONLY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>bind + interfaces only</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>all active interfaces except 127.0.0.1 + that are broadcast capable</EM +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="INVALIDUSERS" +></A +>invalid users (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a list of users that should not be allowed + to login to this service. This is really a <EM +>paranoid</EM +> + check to absolutely ensure an improper setting does not breach + your security.</P +><P +>A name starting with a '@' is interpreted as an NIS + netgroup first (if your system supports NIS), and then as a UNIX + group if the name was not found in the NIS netgroup database.</P +><P +>A name starting with '+' is interpreted only + by looking in the UNIX group database. A name starting with + '&' is interpreted only by looking in the NIS netgroup database + (this requires NIS to be working on your system). The characters + '+' and '&' may be used at the start of the name in either order + so the value <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>+&group</I +></TT +> means check the + UNIX group database, followed by the NIS netgroup database, and + the value <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>&+group</I +></TT +> means check the NIS + netgroup database, followed by the UNIX group database (the + same as the '@' prefix).</P +><P +>The current servicename is substituted for <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%S</I +></TT +>. + This is useful in the [homes] section.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#VALIDUSERS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>valid users + </I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>no invalid users</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>invalid users = root fred admin @wheel + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="KEEPALIVE" +></A +>keepalive (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The value of the parameter (an integer) represents + the number of seconds between <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>keepalive</I +></TT +> + packets. If this parameter is zero, no keepalive packets will be + sent. Keepalive packets, if sent, allow the server to tell whether + a client is still present and responding.</P +><P +>Keepalives should, in general, not be needed if the socket + being used has the SO_KEEPALIVE attribute set on it (see <A +HREF="#SOCKETOPTIONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>socket options</I +></TT +></A +>). + Basically you should only use this option if you strike difficulties.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>keepalive = 300</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>keepalive = 600</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="KERNELOPLOCKS" +></A +>kernel oplocks (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>For UNIXes that support kernel based <A +HREF="#OPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>oplocks</I +></TT +></A +> + (currently only IRIX and the Linux 2.4 kernel), this parameter + allows the use of them to be turned on or off.</P +><P +>Kernel oplocks support allows Samba <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>oplocks + </I +></TT +> to be broken whenever a local UNIX process or NFS operation + accesses a file that <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +> + </A +> has oplocked. This allows complete data consistency between + SMB/CIFS, NFS and local file access (and is a <EM +>very</EM +> + cool feature :-).</P +><P +>This parameter defaults to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>on</TT +>, but is translated + to a no-op on systems that no not have the necessary kernel support. + You should never need to touch this parameter.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#OPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>oplocks</I +></TT +> + </A +> and <A +HREF="#LEVEL2OPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>level2 oplocks + </I +></TT +></A +> parameters.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>kernel oplocks = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LANMANAUTH" +></A +>lanman auth (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter determines whether or not <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> will + attempt to authenticate users using the LANMAN password hash. + If disabled, only clients which support NT password hashes (e.g. Windows + NT/2000 clients, smbclient, etc... but not Windows 95/98 or the MS DOS + network client) will be able to connect to the Samba host.</P +><P +>Default : <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lanman auth = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LARGEREADWRITE" +></A +>large readwrite (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter determines whether or not <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> + supports the new 64k streaming read and write varient SMB requests introduced + with Windows 2000. Note that due to Windows 2000 client redirector bugs + this requires Samba to be running on a 64-bit capable operating system such + as IRIX, Solaris or a Linux 2.4 kernel. Can improve performance by 10% with + Windows 2000 clients. Defaults to on. Not as tested as some other Samba + code paths. + </P +><P +>Default : <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>large readwrite = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LDAPADMINDN" +></A +>ldap admin dn (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter is only available if Samba has been + configure to include the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ldapsam</B +> option + at compile time. This option should be considered experimental and + under active development. + </P +><P +> The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ldap admin dn</I +></TT +> defines the Distinguished + Name (DN) name used by Samba to contact the <A +HREF="#LDAPSERVER" +>ldap + server</A +> when retreiving user account information. The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ldap + admin dn</I +></TT +> is used in conjunction with the admin dn password + stored in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>private/secrets.tdb</TT +> file. See the + <A +HREF="smbpasswd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd(8)</B +></A +> man + page for more information on how to accmplish this. + </P +><P +>Default : <EM +>none</EM +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LDAPFILTER" +></A +>ldap filter (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter is only available if Samba has been + configure to include the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ldapsam</B +> option + at compile time. This option should be considered experimental and + under active development. + </P +><P +> This parameter specifies the RFC 2254 compliant LDAP search filter. + The default is to match the login name with the <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>uid</TT +> + attribute for all entries matching the <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>sambaAccount</TT +> + objectclass. Note that this filter should only return one entry. + </P +><P +>Default : <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ldap filter = (&(uid=%u)(objectclass=sambaAccount))</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LDAPPORT" +></A +>ldap port (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter is only available if Samba has been + configure to include the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ldapsam</B +> option + at compile time. This option should be considered experimental and + under active development. + </P +><P +> This option is used to control the tcp port number used to contact + the <A +HREF="#LDAPSERVER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ldap server</I +></TT +></A +>. + The default is to use the stand LDAPS port 636. + </P +><P +>See Also: <A +HREF="#LDAPSSL" +>ldap ssl</A +> + </P +><P +>Default : <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ldap port = 636</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LDAPSERVER" +></A +>ldap server (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter is only available if Samba has been + configure to include the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ldapsam</B +> option + at compile time. This option should be considered experimental and + under active development. + </P +><P +> This parameter should contains the FQDN of the ldap directory + server which should be queried to locate user account information. + </P +><P +>Default : <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ldap server = localhost</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LDAPSSL" +></A +>ldap ssl (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter is only available if Samba has been + configure to include the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ldapsam</B +> option + at compile time. This option should be considered experimental and + under active development. + </P +><P +> This option is used to define whether or not Samba should + use SSL when connecting to the <A +HREF="#LDAPSERVER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ldap + server</I +></TT +></A +>. This is <EM +>NOT</EM +> related to + Samba SSL support which is enabled by specifying the + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> option to the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>configure</TT +> + script (see <A +HREF="#SSL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl</I +></TT +></A +>). + </P +><P +> The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ldap ssl</I +></TT +> can be set to one of three values: + (a) <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>on</TT +> - Always use SSL when contacting the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ldap server</I +></TT +>, (b) <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>off</TT +> - + Never use SSL when querying the directory, or (c) <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>start_tls</TT +> + - Use the LDAPv3 StartTLS extended operation + (RFC2830) for communicating with the directory server. + </P +><P +>Default : <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ldap ssl = on</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LDAPSUFFIX" +></A +>ldap suffix (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter is only available if Samba has been + configure to include the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ldapsam</B +> option + at compile time. This option should be considered experimental and + under active development. + </P +><P +>Default : <EM +>none</EM +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LEVEL2OPLOCKS" +></A +>level2 oplocks (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter controls whether Samba supports + level2 (read-only) oplocks on a share.</P +><P +>Level2, or read-only oplocks allow Windows NT clients + that have an oplock on a file to downgrade from a read-write oplock + to a read-only oplock once a second client opens the file (instead + of releasing all oplocks on a second open, as in traditional, + exclusive oplocks). This allows all openers of the file that + support level2 oplocks to cache the file for read-ahead only (ie. + they may not cache writes or lock requests) and increases performance + for many accesses of files that are not commonly written (such as + application .EXE files).</P +><P +>Once one of the clients which have a read-only oplock + writes to the file all clients are notified (no reply is needed + or waited for) and told to break their oplocks to "none" and + delete any read-ahead caches.</P +><P +>It is recommended that this parameter be turned on + to speed access to shared executables.</P +><P +>For more discussions on level2 oplocks see the CIFS spec.</P +><P +>Currently, if <A +HREF="#KERNELOPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>kernel + oplocks</I +></TT +></A +> are supported then level2 oplocks are + not granted (even if this parameter is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +>). + Note also, the <A +HREF="#OPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>oplocks</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter must be set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +> on this share in order for + this parameter to have any effect.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#OPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>oplocks</I +></TT +> + </A +> and <A +HREF="#OPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>kernel oplocks</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameters.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>level2 oplocks = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LMANNOUNCE" +></A +>lm announce (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter determines if <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd(8)</B +></A +> will produce Lanman announce + broadcasts that are needed by OS/2 clients in order for them to see + the Samba server in their browse list. This parameter can have three + values, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +>, or + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>auto</TT +>. The default is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>auto</TT +>. + If set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +> Samba will never produce these + broadcasts. If set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +> Samba will produce + Lanman announce broadcasts at a frequency set by the parameter + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lm interval</I +></TT +>. If set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>auto</TT +> + Samba will not send Lanman announce broadcasts by default but will + listen for them. If it hears such a broadcast on the wire it will + then start sending them at a frequency set by the parameter + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lm interval</I +></TT +>.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#LMINTERVAL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lm interval + </I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lm announce = auto</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lm announce = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LMINTERVAL" +></A +>lm interval (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>If Samba is set to produce Lanman announce + broadcasts needed by OS/2 clients (see the <A +HREF="#LMANNOUNCE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lm announce</I +></TT +></A +> parameter) then this + parameter defines the frequency in seconds with which they will be + made. If this is set to zero then no Lanman announcements will be + made despite the setting of the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lm announce</I +></TT +> + parameter.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#LMANNOUNCE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lm + announce</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lm interval = 60</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lm interval = 120</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOADPRINTERS" +></A +>load printers (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>A boolean variable that controls whether all + printers in the printcap will be loaded for browsing by default. + See the <A +HREF="#AEN79" +>printers</A +> section for + more details.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>load printers = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOCALMASTER" +></A +>local master (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> nmbd(8)</B +></A +> to try and become a local master browser + on a subnet. If set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +> then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> nmbd</B +> will not attempt to become a local master browser + on a subnet and will also lose in all browsing elections. By + default this value is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>. Setting this value to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +> doesn't + mean that Samba will <EM +>become</EM +> the local master + browser on a subnet, just that <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> will <EM +> participate</EM +> in elections for local master browser.</P +><P +>Setting this value to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +> will cause <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> + <EM +>never</EM +> to become a local master browser.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>local master = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOCKDIR" +></A +>lock dir (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#LOCKDIRECTORY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> lock directory</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOCKDIRECTORY" +></A +>lock directory (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option specifies the directory where lock + files will be placed. The lock files are used to implement the + <A +HREF="#MAXCONNECTIONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max connections</I +></TT +> + </A +> option.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lock directory = ${prefix}/var/locks</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lock directory = /var/run/samba/locks</B +> + </P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOCKING" +></A +>locking (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls whether or not locking will be + performed by the server in response to lock requests from the + client.</P +><P +>If <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>locking = no</B +>, all lock and unlock + requests will appear to succeed and all lock queries will report + that the file in question is available for locking.</P +><P +>If <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>locking = yes</B +>, real locking will be performed + by the server.</P +><P +>This option <EM +>may</EM +> be useful for read-only + filesystems which <EM +>may</EM +> not need locking (such as + CDROM drives), although setting this parameter of <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +> + is not really recommended even in this case.</P +><P +>Be careful about disabling locking either globally or in a + specific service, as lack of locking may result in data corruption. + You should never need to set this parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>locking = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOGFILE" +></A +>log file (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows you to override the name + of the Samba log file (also known as the debug file).</P +><P +>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing + you to have separate log files for each user or machine.</P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>log file = /usr/local/samba/var/log.%m + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOGLEVEL" +></A +>log level (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The value of the parameter (an integer) allows + the debug level (logging level) to be specified in the + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file. This is to give greater + flexibility in the configuration of the system.</P +><P +>The default will be the log level specified on + the command line or level zero if none was specified.</P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>log level = 3</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOGONDRIVE" +></A +>logon drive (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the local path to + which the home directory will be connected (see <A +HREF="#LOGONHOME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>logon home</I +></TT +></A +>) + and is only used by NT Workstations. </P +><P +>Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a + logon server.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>logon drive = z:</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>logon drive = h:</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOGONHOME" +></A +>logon home (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the home directory + location when a Win95/98 or NT Workstation logs into a Samba PDC. + It allows you to do </P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>C:\> </TT +><TT +CLASS="USERINPUT" +><B +>NET USE H: /HOME</B +></TT +> + </P +><P +>from a command prompt, for example.</P +><P +>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing + you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine.</P +><P +>This parameter can be used with Win9X workstations to ensure + that roaming profiles are stored in a subdirectory of the user's + home directory. This is done in the following way:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>logon home = \\%N\%U\profile</B +></P +><P +>This tells Samba to return the above string, with + substitutions made when a client requests the info, generally + in a NetUserGetInfo request. Win9X clients truncate the info to + \\server\share when a user does <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>net use /home</B +> + but use the whole string when dealing with profiles.</P +><P +>Note that in prior versions of Samba, the <A +HREF="#LOGONPATH" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>logon path</I +></TT +></A +> was returned rather than + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>logon home</I +></TT +>. This broke <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>net use + /home</B +> but allowed profiles outside the home directory. + The current implementation is correct, and can be used for + profiles if you use the above trick.</P +><P +>This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon + server.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>logon home = "\\%N\%U"</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>logon home = "\\remote_smb_server\%U"</B +> + </P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOGONPATH" +></A +>logon path (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the home directory + where roaming profiles (NTuser.dat etc files for Windows NT) are + stored. Contrary to previous versions of these manual pages, it has + nothing to do with Win 9X roaming profiles. To find out how to + handle roaming profiles for Win 9X system, see the <A +HREF="#LOGONHOME" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>logon home</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you + to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine. It also + specifies the directory from which the "Application Data", + (<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>desktop</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>start menu</TT +>, + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>network neighborhood</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>programs</TT +> + and other folders, and their contents, are loaded and displayed on + your Windows NT client.</P +><P +>The share and the path must be readable by the user for + the preferences and directories to be loaded onto the Windows NT + client. The share must be writeable when the user logs in for the first + time, in order that the Windows NT client can create the NTuser.dat + and other directories.</P +><P +>Thereafter, the directories and any of the contents can, + if required, be made read-only. It is not advisable that the + NTuser.dat file be made read-only - rename it to NTuser.man to + achieve the desired effect (a <EM +>MAN</EM +>datory + profile). </P +><P +>Windows clients can sometimes maintain a connection to + the [homes] share, even though there is no user logged in. + Therefore, it is vital that the logon path does not include a + reference to the homes share (i.e. setting this parameter to + \%N\%U\profile_path will cause problems).</P +><P +>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing + you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine.</P +><P +>Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up + as a logon server.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>logon path = \\%N\%U\profile</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>logon path = \\PROFILESERVER\PROFILE\%U</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOGONSCRIPT" +></A +>logon script (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the batch file (.bat) or + NT command file (.cmd) to be downloaded and run on a machine when + a user successfully logs in. The file must contain the DOS + style CR/LF line endings. Using a DOS-style editor to create the + file is recommended.</P +><P +>The script must be a relative path to the [netlogon] + service. If the [netlogon] service specifies a <A +HREF="#PATH" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>path</I +></TT +></A +> of <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/usr/local/samba/netlogon + </TT +>, and <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>logon script = STARTUP.BAT</B +>, then + the file that will be downloaded is:</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/usr/local/samba/netlogon/STARTUP.BAT</TT +></P +><P +>The contents of the batch file are entirely your choice. A + suggested command would be to add <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>NET TIME \\SERVER /SET + /YES</B +>, to force every machine to synchronize clocks with + the same time server. Another use would be to add <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>NET USE + U: \\SERVER\UTILS</B +> for commonly used utilities, or <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> NET USE Q: \\SERVER\ISO9001_QA</B +> for example.</P +><P +>Note that it is particularly important not to allow write + access to the [netlogon] share, or to grant users write permission + on the batch files in a secure environment, as this would allow + the batch files to be arbitrarily modified and security to be + breached.</P +><P +>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you + to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine.</P +><P +>This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon + server.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>no logon script defined</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>logon script = scripts\%U.bat</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LPPAUSECOMMAND" +></A +>lppause command (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the command to be + executed on the server host in order to stop printing or spooling + a specific print job.</P +><P +>This command should be a program or script which takes + a printer name and job number to pause the print job. One way + of implementing this is by using job priorities, where jobs + having a too low priority won't be sent to the printer.</P +><P +>If a <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%p</I +></TT +> is given then the printer name + is put in its place. A <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%j</I +></TT +> is replaced with + the job number (an integer). On HPUX (see <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing=hpux + </I +></TT +>), if the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>-p%p</I +></TT +> option is added + to the lpq command, the job will show up with the correct status, i.e. + if the job priority is lower than the set fence priority it will + have the PAUSED status, whereas if the priority is equal or higher it + will have the SPOOLED or PRINTING status.</P +><P +>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path + in the lppause command as the PATH may not be available to the server.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#PRINTING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: Currently no default value is given to + this string, unless the value of the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing</I +></TT +> + parameter is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>SYSV</TT +>, in which case the default is :</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lp -i %p-%j -H hold</B +></P +><P +>or if the value of the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing</I +></TT +> parameter + is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>SOFTQ</TT +>, then the default is:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>qstat -s -j%j -h</B +></P +><P +>Example for HPUX: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lppause command = /usr/bin/lpalt + %p-%j -p0</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LPQCACHETIME" +></A +>lpq cache time (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls how long lpq info will be cached + for to prevent the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpq</B +> command being called too + often. A separate cache is kept for each variation of the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> lpq</B +> command used by the system, so if you use different + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpq</B +> commands for different users then they won't + share cache information.</P +><P +>The cache files are stored in <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/tmp/lpq.xxxx</TT +> + where xxxx is a hash of the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpq</B +> command in use.</P +><P +>The default is 10 seconds, meaning that the cached results + of a previous identical <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpq</B +> command will be used + if the cached data is less than 10 seconds old. A large value may + be advisable if your <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpq</B +> command is very slow.</P +><P +>A value of 0 will disable caching completely.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#PRINTING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpq cache time = 10</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpq cache time = 30</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LPQCOMMAND" +></A +>lpq command (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the command to be + executed on the server host in order to obtain <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpq + </B +>-style printer status information.</P +><P +>This command should be a program or script which + takes a printer name as its only parameter and outputs printer + status information.</P +><P +>Currently eight styles of printer status information + are supported; BSD, AIX, LPRNG, PLP, SYSV, HPUX, QNX and SOFTQ. + This covers most UNIX systems. You control which type is expected + using the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing =</I +></TT +> option.</P +><P +>Some clients (notably Windows for Workgroups) may not + correctly send the connection number for the printer they are + requesting status information about. To get around this, the + server reports on the first printer service connected to by the + client. This only happens if the connection number sent is invalid.</P +><P +>If a <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%p</I +></TT +> is given then the printer name + is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the + command.</P +><P +>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path + in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lpq command</I +></TT +> as the <TT +CLASS="ENVAR" +>$PATH + </TT +> may not be available to the server.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#PRINTING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>depends on the setting of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> printing</I +></TT +></EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpq command = /usr/bin/lpq -P%p</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LPRESUMECOMMAND" +></A +>lpresume command (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the command to be + executed on the server host in order to restart or continue + printing or spooling a specific print job.</P +><P +>This command should be a program or script which takes + a printer name and job number to resume the print job. See + also the <A +HREF="#LPPAUSECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lppause command + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>If a <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%p</I +></TT +> is given then the printer name + is put in its place. A <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%j</I +></TT +> is replaced with + the job number (an integer).</P +><P +>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path + in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lpresume command</I +></TT +> as the PATH may not + be available to the server.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#PRINTING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: Currently no default value is given + to this string, unless the value of the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing</I +></TT +> + parameter is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>SYSV</TT +>, in which case the default is :</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lp -i %p-%j -H resume</B +></P +><P +>or if the value of the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing</I +></TT +> parameter + is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>SOFTQ</TT +>, then the default is:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>qstat -s -j%j -r</B +></P +><P +>Example for HPUX: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpresume command = /usr/bin/lpalt + %p-%j -p2</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LPRMCOMMAND" +></A +>lprm command (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the command to be + executed on the server host in order to delete a print job.</P +><P +>This command should be a program or script which takes + a printer name and job number, and deletes the print job.</P +><P +>If a <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%p</I +></TT +> is given then the printer name + is put in its place. A <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%j</I +></TT +> is replaced with + the job number (an integer).</P +><P +>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute + path in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lprm command</I +></TT +> as the PATH may not be + available to the server.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#PRINTING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>depends on the setting of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing + </I +></TT +></EM +></P +><P +>Example 1: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lprm command = /usr/bin/lprm -P%p %j + </B +></P +><P +>Example 2: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lprm command = /usr/bin/cancel %p-%j + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MACHINEPASSWORDTIMEOUT" +></A +>machine password timeout (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>If a Samba server is a member of a Windows + NT Domain (see the <A +HREF="#SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN" +>security = domain</A +>) + parameter) then periodically a running <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> smbd(8)</A +> process will try and change the MACHINE ACCOUNT + PASSWORD stored in the TDB called <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>private/secrets.tdb + </TT +>. This parameter specifies how often this password + will be changed, in seconds. The default is one week (expressed in + seconds), the same as a Windows NT Domain member server.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="smbpasswd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd(8) + </B +></A +>, and the <A +HREF="#SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN" +> security = domain</A +>) parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>machine password timeout = 604800</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAGICOUTPUT" +></A +>magic output (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the name of a file + which will contain output created by a magic script (see the + <A +HREF="#MAGICSCRIPT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>magic script</I +></TT +></A +> + parameter below).</P +><P +>Warning: If two clients use the same <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>magic script + </I +></TT +> in the same directory the output file content + is undefined.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>magic output = <magic script name>.out + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>magic output = myfile.txt</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAGICSCRIPT" +></A +>magic script (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the name of a file which, + if opened, will be executed by the server when the file is closed. + This allows a UNIX script to be sent to the Samba host and + executed on behalf of the connected user.</P +><P +>Scripts executed in this way will be deleted upon + completion assuming that the user has the appropriate level + of privilege and the file permissions allow the deletion.</P +><P +>If the script generates output, output will be sent to + the file specified by the <A +HREF="#MAGICOUTPUT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> magic output</I +></TT +></A +> parameter (see above).</P +><P +>Note that some shells are unable to interpret scripts + containing CR/LF instead of CR as + the end-of-line marker. Magic scripts must be executable + <EM +>as is</EM +> on the host, which for some hosts and + some shells will require filtering at the DOS end.</P +><P +>Magic scripts are <EM +>EXPERIMENTAL</EM +> and + should <EM +>NOT</EM +> be relied upon.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>None. Magic scripts disabled.</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>magic script = user.csh</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MANGLECASE" +></A +>mangle case (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>See the section on <A +HREF="#AEN203" +> NAME MANGLING</A +></P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>mangle case = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MANGLEDMAP" +></A +>mangled map (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is for those who want to directly map UNIX + file names which cannot be represented on Windows/DOS. The mangling + of names is not always what is needed. In particular you may have + documents with file extensions that differ between DOS and UNIX. + For example, under UNIX it is common to use <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>.html</TT +> + for HTML files, whereas under Windows/DOS <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>.htm</TT +> + is more commonly used.</P +><P +>So to map <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>html</TT +> to <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>htm</TT +> + you would use:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>mangled map = (*.html *.htm)</B +></P +><P +>One very useful case is to remove the annoying <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>;1 + </TT +> off the ends of filenames on some CDROMs (only visible + under some UNIXes). To do this use a map of (*;1 *;).</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>no mangled map</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>mangled map = (*;1 *;)</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MANGLEDNAMES" +></A +>mangled names (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls whether non-DOS names under UNIX + should be mapped to DOS-compatible names ("mangled") and made visible, + or whether non-DOS names should simply be ignored.</P +><P +>See the section on <A +HREF="#AEN203" +> NAME MANGLING</A +> for details on how to control the mangling process.</P +><P +>If mangling is used then the mangling algorithm is as follows:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>The first (up to) five alphanumeric characters + before the rightmost dot of the filename are preserved, forced + to upper case, and appear as the first (up to) five characters + of the mangled name.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>A tilde "~" is appended to the first part of the mangled + name, followed by a two-character unique sequence, based on the + original root name (i.e., the original filename minus its final + extension). The final extension is included in the hash calculation + only if it contains any upper case characters or is longer than three + characters.</P +><P +>Note that the character to use may be specified using + the <A +HREF="#MANGLINGCHAR" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>mangling char</I +></TT +> + </A +> option, if you don't like '~'.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>The first three alphanumeric characters of the final + extension are preserved, forced to upper case and appear as the + extension of the mangled name. The final extension is defined as that + part of the original filename after the rightmost dot. If there are no + dots in the filename, the mangled name will have no extension (except + in the case of "hidden files" - see below).</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Files whose UNIX name begins with a dot will be + presented as DOS hidden files. The mangled name will be created as + for other filenames, but with the leading dot removed and "___" as + its extension regardless of actual original extension (that's three + underscores).</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>The two-digit hash value consists of upper case + alphanumeric characters.</P +><P +>This algorithm can cause name collisions only if files + in a directory share the same first five alphanumeric characters. + The probability of such a clash is 1/1300.</P +><P +>The name mangling (if enabled) allows a file to be + copied between UNIX directories from Windows/DOS while retaining + the long UNIX filename. UNIX files can be renamed to a new extension + from Windows/DOS and will retain the same basename. Mangled names + do not change between sessions.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>mangled names = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MANGLEDSTACK" +></A +>mangled stack (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter controls the number of mangled names + that should be cached in the Samba server <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> smbd(8)</A +>.</P +><P +>This stack is a list of recently mangled base names + (extensions are only maintained if they are longer than 3 characters + or contains upper case characters).</P +><P +>The larger this value, the more likely it is that mangled + names can be successfully converted to correct long UNIX names. + However, large stack sizes will slow most directory accesses. Smaller + stacks save memory in the server (each stack element costs 256 bytes). + </P +><P +>It is not possible to absolutely guarantee correct long + filenames, so be prepared for some surprises!</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>mangled stack = 50</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>mangled stack = 100</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MANGLINGCHAR" +></A +>mangling char (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls what character is used as + the <EM +>magic</EM +> character in <A +HREF="#AEN203" +>name mangling</A +>. The default is a '~' + but this may interfere with some software. Use this option to set + it to whatever you prefer.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>mangling char = ~</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>mangling char = ^</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAPARCHIVE" +></A +>map archive (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls whether the DOS archive attribute + should be mapped to the UNIX owner execute bit. The DOS archive bit + is set when a file has been modified since its last backup. One + motivation for this option it to keep Samba/your PC from making + any file it touches from becoming executable under UNIX. This can + be quite annoying for shared source code, documents, etc...</P +><P +>Note that this requires the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask</I +></TT +> + parameter to be set such that owner execute bit is not masked out + (i.e. it must include 100). See the parameter <A +HREF="#CREATEMASK" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask</I +></TT +></A +> for details.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>map archive = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAPHIDDEN" +></A +>map hidden (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls whether DOS style hidden files + should be mapped to the UNIX world execute bit.</P +><P +>Note that this requires the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask</I +></TT +> + to be set such that the world execute bit is not masked out (i.e. + it must include 001). See the parameter <A +HREF="#CREATEMASK" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask</I +></TT +></A +> for details.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>map hidden = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAPSYSTEM" +></A +>map system (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls whether DOS style system files + should be mapped to the UNIX group execute bit.</P +><P +>Note that this requires the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask</I +></TT +> + to be set such that the group execute bit is not masked out (i.e. + it must include 010). See the parameter <A +HREF="#CREATEMASK" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask</I +></TT +></A +> for details.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>map system = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAPTOGUEST" +></A +>map to guest (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter is only useful in <A +HREF="#SECURITY" +> security</A +> modes other than <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security = share</I +></TT +> + - i.e. <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>user</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>server</TT +>, + and <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>domain</TT +>.</P +><P +>This parameter can take three different values, which tell + <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> what to do with user + login requests that don't match a valid UNIX user in some way.</P +><P +>The three settings are :</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>Never</TT +> - Means user login + requests with an invalid password are rejected. This is the + default.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>Bad User</TT +> - Means user + logins with an invalid password are rejected, unless the username + does not exist, in which case it is treated as a guest login and + mapped into the <A +HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> guest account</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>Bad Password</TT +> - Means user logins + with an invalid password are treated as a guest login and mapped + into the <A +HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT" +>guest account</A +>. Note that + this can cause problems as it means that any user incorrectly typing + their password will be silently logged on as "guest" - and + will not know the reason they cannot access files they think + they should - there will have been no message given to them + that they got their password wrong. Helpdesk services will + <EM +>hate</EM +> you if you set the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map to + guest</I +></TT +> parameter this way :-).</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>Note that this parameter is needed to set up "Guest" + share services when using <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security</I +></TT +> modes other than + share. This is because in these modes the name of the resource being + requested is <EM +>not</EM +> sent to the server until after + the server has successfully authenticated the client so the server + cannot make authentication decisions at the correct time (connection + to the share) for "Guest" shares.</P +><P +>For people familiar with the older Samba releases, this + parameter maps to the old compile-time setting of the <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +> GUEST_SESSSETUP</TT +> value in local.h.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>map to guest = Never</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>map to guest = Bad User</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAXCONNECTIONS" +></A +>max connections (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows the number of simultaneous + connections to a service to be limited. If <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max connections + </I +></TT +> is greater than 0 then connections will be refused if + this number of connections to the service are already open. A value + of zero mean an unlimited number of connections may be made.</P +><P +>Record lock files are used to implement this feature. The + lock files will be stored in the directory specified by the <A +HREF="#LOCKDIRECTORY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lock directory</I +></TT +></A +> + option.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max connections = 0</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max connections = 10</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAXDISKSIZE" +></A +>max disk size (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows you to put an upper limit + on the apparent size of disks. If you set this option to 100 + then all shares will appear to be not larger than 100 MB in + size.</P +><P +>Note that this option does not limit the amount of + data you can put on the disk. In the above case you could still + store much more than 100 MB on the disk, but if a client ever asks + for the amount of free disk space or the total disk size then the + result will be bounded by the amount specified in <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max + disk size</I +></TT +>.</P +><P +>This option is primarily useful to work around bugs + in some pieces of software that can't handle very large disks, + particularly disks over 1GB in size.</P +><P +>A <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max disk size</I +></TT +> of 0 means no limit.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max disk size = 0</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max disk size = 1000</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAXLOGSIZE" +></A +>max log size (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option (an integer in kilobytes) specifies + the max size the log file should grow to. Samba periodically checks + the size and if it is exceeded it will rename the file, adding + a <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>.old</TT +> extension.</P +><P +>A size of 0 means no limit.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max log size = 5000</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max log size = 1000</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAXMUX" +></A +>max mux (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option controls the maximum number of + outstanding simultaneous SMB operations that Samba tells the client + it will allow. You should never need to set this parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max mux = 50</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAXOPENFILES" +></A +>max open files (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter limits the maximum number of + open files that one <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> file + serving process may have open for a client at any one time. The + default for this parameter is set very high (10,000) as Samba uses + only one bit per unopened file.</P +><P +>The limit of the number of open files is usually set + by the UNIX per-process file descriptor limit rather than + this parameter so you should never need to touch this parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max open files = 10000</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAXPRINTJOBS" +></A +>max print jobs (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter limits the maximum number of + jobs allowable in a Samba printer queue at any given moment. + If this number is exceeded, <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> smbd(8)</B +></A +> will remote "Out of Space" to the client. + See all <A +HREF="#TOTALPRINTJOBS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>total + print jobs</I +></TT +></A +>. + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max print jobs = 1000</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max print jobs = 5000</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAXPROTOCOL" +></A +>max protocol (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest + protocol level that will be supported by the server.</P +><P +>Possible values are :</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>CORE</TT +>: Earliest version. No + concept of user names.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>COREPLUS</TT +>: Slight improvements on + CORE for efficiency.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>LANMAN1</TT +>: First <EM +> modern</EM +> version of the protocol. Long filename + support.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>LANMAN2</TT +>: Updates to Lanman1 protocol. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>NT1</TT +>: Current up to date version of + the protocol. Used by Windows NT. Known as CIFS.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>Normally this option should not be set as the automatic + negotiation phase in the SMB protocol takes care of choosing + the appropriate protocol.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#MINPROTOCOL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>min + protocol</I +></TT +></A +></P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max protocol = NT1</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max protocol = LANMAN1</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAXSMBDPROCESSES" +></A +>max smbd processes (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter limits the maximum number of + <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +> + processes concurrently running on a system and is intended + as a stopgap to prevent degrading service to clients in the event + that the server has insufficient resources to handle more than this + number of connections. Remember that under normal operating + conditions, each user will have an <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> associated with him or her + to handle connections to all shares from a given host. + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max smbd processes = 0</B +> ## no limit</P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max smbd processes = 1000</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAXTTL" +></A +>max ttl (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option tells <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> + what the default 'time to live' of NetBIOS names should be (in seconds) + when <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> is requesting a name using either a + broadcast packet or from a WINS server. You should never need to + change this parameter. The default is 3 days.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max ttl = 259200</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAXWINSTTL" +></A +>max wins ttl (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option tells <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8) + </A +> when acting as a WINS server (<A +HREF="#WINSSUPPORT" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>wins support = yes</I +></TT +></A +>) what the maximum + 'time to live' of NetBIOS names that <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> + will grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to change this + parameter. The default is 6 days (518400 seconds).</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#MINWINSTTL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>min + wins ttl</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max wins ttl = 518400</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAXXMIT" +></A +>max xmit (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option controls the maximum packet size + that will be negotiated by Samba. The default is 65535, which + is the maximum. In some cases you may find you get better performance + with a smaller value. A value below 2048 is likely to cause problems. + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max xmit = 65535</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max xmit = 8192</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MESSAGECOMMAND" +></A +>message command (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This specifies what command to run when the + server receives a WinPopup style message.</P +><P +>This would normally be a command that would + deliver the message somehow. How this is to be done is + up to your imagination.</P +><P +>An example is:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>message command = csh -c 'xedit %s;rm %s' &</B +> + </P +><P +>This delivers the message using <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>xedit</B +>, then + removes it afterwards. <EM +>NOTE THAT IT IS VERY IMPORTANT + THAT THIS COMMAND RETURN IMMEDIATELY</EM +>. That's why I + have the '&' on the end. If it doesn't return immediately then + your PCs may freeze when sending messages (they should recover + after 30 seconds, hopefully).</P +><P +>All messages are delivered as the global guest user. + The command takes the standard substitutions, although <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> %u</I +></TT +> won't work (<TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%U</I +></TT +> may be better + in this case).</P +><P +>Apart from the standard substitutions, some additional + ones apply. In particular:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%s</I +></TT +> = the filename containing + the message.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%t</I +></TT +> = the destination that + the message was sent to (probably the server name).</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%f</I +></TT +> = who the message + is from.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>You could make this command send mail, or whatever else + takes your fancy. Please let us know of any really interesting + ideas you have.</P +><P +>Here's a way of sending the messages as mail to root:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>message command = /bin/mail -s 'message from %f on + %m' root < %s; rm %s</B +></P +><P +>If you don't have a message command then the message + won't be delivered and Samba will tell the sender there was + an error. Unfortunately WfWg totally ignores the error code + and carries on regardless, saying that the message was delivered. + </P +><P +>If you want to silently delete it then try:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>message command = rm %s</B +></P +><P +>Default: <EM +>no message command</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>message command = csh -c 'xedit %s; + rm %s' &</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MINPASSWDLENGTH" +></A +>min passwd length (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#MINPASSWORDLENGTH" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>min password length</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MINPASSWORDLENGTH" +></A +>min password length (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option sets the minimum length in characters + of a plaintext password that <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will accept when performing + UNIX password changing.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#UNIXPASSWORDSYNC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>unix + password sync</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd program</I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#PASSWDCHATDEBUG" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd chat debug</I +></TT +> + </A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>min password length = 5</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MINPRINTSPACE" +></A +>min print space (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This sets the minimum amount of free disk + space that must be available before a user will be able to spool + a print job. It is specified in kilobytes. The default is 0, which + means a user can always spool a print job.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#PRINTING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>min print space = 0</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>min print space = 2000</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MINPROTOCOL" +></A +>min protocol (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The value of the parameter (a string) is the + lowest SMB protocol dialect than Samba will support. Please refer + to the <A +HREF="#MAXPROTOCOL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max protocol</I +></TT +></A +> + parameter for a list of valid protocol names and a brief description + of each. You may also wish to refer to the C source code in + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>source/smbd/negprot.c</TT +> for a listing of known protocol + dialects supported by clients.</P +><P +>If you are viewing this parameter as a security measure, you should + also refer to the <A +HREF="#LANMANAUTH" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lanman + auth</I +></TT +></A +> parameter. Otherwise, you should never need + to change this parameter.</P +><P +>Default : <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>min protocol = CORE</B +></P +><P +>Example : <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>min protocol = NT1</B +> # disable DOS + clients</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MINWINSTTL" +></A +>min wins ttl (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option tells <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> + when acting as a WINS server (<A +HREF="#WINSSUPPORT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> wins support = yes</I +></TT +></A +>) what the minimum 'time to live' + of NetBIOS names that <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> will grant will be (in + seconds). You should never need to change this parameter. The default + is 6 hours (21600 seconds).</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>min wins ttl = 21600</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MSDFSROOT" +></A +>msdfs root (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter is only available if + Samba is configured and compiled with the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> --with-msdfs</B +> option. If set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +>, + Samba treats the share as a Dfs root and allows clients to browse + the distributed file system tree rooted at the share directory. + Dfs links are specified in the share directory by symbolic + links of the form <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>msdfs:serverA\shareA,serverB\shareB + </TT +> and so on. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree + on Samba, refer to <A +HREF="msdfs_setup.html" +TARGET="_top" +>msdfs_setup.html + </A +>.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#HOSTMSDFS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>host msdfs + </I +></TT +></A +></P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>msdfs root = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="NAMERESOLVEORDER" +></A +>name resolve order (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option is used by the programs in the Samba + suite to determine what naming services to use and in what order + to resolve host names to IP addresses. The option takes a space + separated string of name resolution options.</P +><P +>The options are :"lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast". They + cause names to be resolved as follows :</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>lmhosts</TT +> : Lookup an IP + address in the Samba lmhosts file. If the line in lmhosts has + no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the <A +HREF="lmhosts.5.html" +TARGET="_top" +>lmhosts(5)</A +> for details) then + any name type matches for lookup.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>host</TT +> : Do a standard host + name to IP address resolution, using the system <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/hosts + </TT +>, NIS, or DNS lookups. This method of name resolution + is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or Solaris this + may be controlled by the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT +> + file. Note that this method is only used if the NetBIOS name + type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type, otherwise + it is ignored.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>wins</TT +> : Query a name with + the IP address listed in the <A +HREF="#WINSSERVER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> wins server</I +></TT +></A +> parameter. If no WINS server has + been specified this method will be ignored.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>bcast</TT +> : Do a broadcast on + each of the known local interfaces listed in the <A +HREF="#INTERFACES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>interfaces</I +></TT +></A +> + parameter. This is the least reliable of the name resolution + methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally + connected subnet.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>name resolve order = lmhosts host wins bcast + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>name resolve order = lmhosts bcast host + </B +></P +><P +>This will cause the local lmhosts file to be examined + first, followed by a broadcast attempt, followed by a normal + system hostname lookup.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="NETBIOSALIASES" +></A +>netbios aliases (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a list of NetBIOS names that <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> will advertise as additional + names by which the Samba server is known. This allows one machine + to appear in browse lists under multiple names. If a machine is + acting as a browse server or logon server none + of these names will be advertised as either browse server or logon + servers, only the primary name of the machine will be advertised + with these capabilities.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#NETBIOSNAME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>netbios + name</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>empty string (no additional names)</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>netbios aliases = TEST TEST1 TEST2</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="NETBIOSNAME" +></A +>netbios name (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This sets the NetBIOS name by which a Samba + server is known. By default it is the same as the first component + of the host's DNS name. If a machine is a browse server or + logon server this name (or the first component + of the hosts DNS name) will be the name that these services are + advertised under.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#NETBIOSALIASES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>netbios + aliases</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>machine DNS name</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>netbios name = MYNAME</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="NETBIOSSCOPE" +></A +>netbios scope (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This sets the NetBIOS scope that Samba will + operate under. This should not be set unless every machine + on your LAN also sets this value.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="NISHOMEDIR" +></A +>nis homedir (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Get the home share server from a NIS map. For + UNIX systems that use an automounter, the user's home directory + will often be mounted on a workstation on demand from a remote + server. </P +><P +>When the Samba logon server is not the actual home directory + server, but is mounting the home directories via NFS then two + network hops would be required to access the users home directory + if the logon server told the client to use itself as the SMB server + for home directories (one over SMB and one over NFS). This can + be very slow.</P +><P +>This option allows Samba to return the home share as + being on a different server to the logon server and as + long as a Samba daemon is running on the home directory server, + it will be mounted on the Samba client directly from the directory + server. When Samba is returning the home share to the client, it + will consult the NIS map specified in <A +HREF="#HOMEDIRMAP" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>homedir map</I +></TT +></A +> and return the server + listed there.</P +><P +>Note that for this option to work there must be a working + NIS system and the Samba server with this option must also + be a logon server.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nis homedir = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="NONUNIXACCOUNTRANGE" +></A +>non unix account range (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The non unix account range parameter specifies + the range of 'user ids' that are allocated by the various 'non unix + account' passdb backends. These backends allow + the storage of passwords for users who don't exist in /etc/passwd. + This is most often used for machine account creation. + This range of ids should have no existing local or NIS users within + it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise.</P +><P +>NOTE: These userids never appear on the system and Samba will never + 'become' these users. They are used only to ensure that the algorithmic + RID mapping does not conflict with normal users. + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>non unix account range = <empty string> + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>non unix account range = 10000-20000</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="NTACLSUPPORT" +></A +>nt acl support (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter controls whether + <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> will attempt to map + UNIX permissions into Windows NT access control lists. + This parameter was formally a global parameter in releases + prior to 2.2.2.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nt acl support = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="NTPIPESUPPORT" +></A +>nt pipe support (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter controls whether + <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> will allow Windows NT + clients to connect to the NT SMB specific <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>IPC$</TT +> + pipes. This is a developer debugging option and can be left + alone.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nt pipe support = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="NULLPASSWORDS" +></A +>null passwords (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Allow or disallow client access to accounts + that have null passwords. </P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="smbpasswd.5.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbpasswd (5)</A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>null passwords = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS" +></A +>obey pam restrictions (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>When Samba 2.2 is configured to enable PAM support + (i.e. --with-pam), this parameter will control whether or not Samba + should obey PAM's account and session management directives. The + default behavior is to use PAM for clear text authentication only + and to ignore any account or session management. Note that Samba + always ignores PAM for authentication in the case of <A +HREF="#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>encrypt passwords = yes</I +></TT +> + </A +>. The reason is that PAM modules cannot support the challenge/response + authentication mechanism needed in the presence of SMB password encryption. + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>obey pam restrictions = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ONLYUSER" +></A +>only user (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a boolean option that controls whether + connections with usernames not in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>user</I +></TT +> + list will be allowed. By default this option is disabled so that a + client can supply a username to be used by the server. Enabling + this parameter will force the server to only user the login + names from the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>user</I +></TT +> list and is only really + useful in <A +HREF="#SECURITYEQUALSSHARE" +>shave level</A +> + security.</P +><P +>Note that this also means Samba won't try to deduce + usernames from the service name. This can be annoying for + the [homes] section. To get around this you could use <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>user = + %S</B +> which means your <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>user</I +></TT +> list + will be just the service name, which for home directories is the + name of the user.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#USER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>user</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>only user = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ONLYGUEST" +></A +>only guest (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>A synonym for <A +HREF="#GUESTONLY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> guest only</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="OPLOCKBREAKWAITTIME" +></A +>oplock break wait time (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a tuning parameter added due to bugs in + both Windows 9x and WinNT. If Samba responds to a client too + quickly when that client issues an SMB that can cause an oplock + break request, then the network client can fail and not respond + to the break request. This tuning parameter (which is set in milliseconds) + is the amount of time Samba will wait before sending an oplock break + request to such (broken) clients.</P +><P +><EM +>DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ + AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE</EM +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>oplock break wait time = 0</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="OPLOCKCONTENTIONLIMIT" +></A +>oplock contention limit (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a <EM +>very</EM +> advanced + <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> tuning option to + improve the efficiency of the granting of oplocks under multiple + client contention for the same file.</P +><P +>In brief it specifies a number, which causes <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> not to + grant an oplock even when requested if the approximate number of + clients contending for an oplock on the same file goes over this + limit. This causes <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> to behave in a similar + way to Windows NT.</P +><P +><EM +>DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ + AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE</EM +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>oplock contention limit = 2</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="OPLOCKS" +></A +>oplocks (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean option tells <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> whether to + issue oplocks (opportunistic locks) to file open requests on this + share. The oplock code can dramatically (approx. 30% or more) improve + the speed of access to files on Samba servers. It allows the clients + to aggressively cache files locally and you may want to disable this + option for unreliable network environments (it is turned on by + default in Windows NT Servers). For more information see the file + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>Speed.txt</TT +> in the Samba <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>docs/</TT +> + directory.</P +><P +>Oplocks may be selectively turned off on certain files with a + share. See the <A +HREF="#VETOOPLOCKFILES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> veto oplock files</I +></TT +></A +> parameter. On some systems + oplocks are recognized by the underlying operating system. This + allows data synchronization between all access to oplocked files, + whether it be via Samba or NFS or a local UNIX process. See the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>kernel oplocks</I +></TT +> parameter for details.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#KERNELOPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>kernel + oplocks</I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#LEVEL2OPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> level2 oplocks</I +></TT +></A +> parameters.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>oplocks = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="OSLEVEL" +></A +>os level (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This integer value controls what level Samba + advertises itself as for browse elections. The value of this + parameter determines whether <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> + has a chance of becoming a local master browser for the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> WORKGROUP</I +></TT +> in the local broadcast area.</P +><P +><EM +>Note :</EM +>By default, Samba will win + a local master browsing election over all Microsoft operating + systems except a Windows NT 4.0/2000 Domain Controller. This + means that a misconfigured Samba host can effectively isolate + a subnet for browsing purposes. See <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>BROWSING.txt + </TT +> in the Samba <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>docs/</TT +> directory + for details.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>os level = 20</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>os level = 65 </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="OS2DRIVERMAP" +></A +>os2 driver map (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The parameter is used to define the absolute + path to a file containing a mapping of Windows NT printer driver + names to OS/2 printer driver names. The format is:</P +><P +><nt driver name> = <os2 driver + name>.<device name></P +><P +>For example, a valid entry using the HP LaserJet 5 + printer driver would appear as <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>HP LaserJet 5L = LASERJET.HP + LaserJet 5L</B +>.</P +><P +>The need for the file is due to the printer driver namespace + problem described in the <A +HREF="printer_driver2.html" +TARGET="_top" +>Samba + Printing HOWTO</A +>. For more details on OS/2 clients, please + refer to the <A +HREF="OS2-Client-HOWTO.html" +TARGET="_top" +>OS2-Client-HOWTO + </A +> containing in the Samba documentation.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>os2 driver map = <empty string> + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PAMPASSWORDCHANGE" +></A +>pam password change (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>With the addition of better PAM support in Samba 2.2, + this parameter, it is possible to use PAM's password change control + flag for Samba. If enabled, then PAM will be used for password + changes when requested by an SMB client instead of the program listed in + <A +HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd program</I +></TT +></A +>. + It should be possible to enable this without changing your + <A +HREF="#PASSWDCHAT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd chat</I +></TT +></A +> + parameter for most setups. + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>pam password change = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PANICACTION" +></A +>panic action (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a Samba developer option that allows a + system command to be called when either <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> smbd(8)</A +> or <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> + crashes. This is usually used to draw attention to the fact that + a problem occurred.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>panic action = <empty string></B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>panic action = "/bin/sleep 90000"</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PASSDBBACKEND" +></A +>passdb backend (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows the administrator to chose what + backend in which to store passwords. This allows (for example) both + smbpasswd and tdbsam to be used without a recompile. Only one can + be used at a time however, and experimental backends must still be selected + (eg --with-tdbsam) at configure time. + </P +><P +>This paramater is in two parts, the backend's name, and a 'location' + string that has meaning only to that particular backed. These are separated + by a : character.</P +><P +>Available backends can include: + <P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd</B +> - The default smbpasswd + backend. Takes a path to the smbpasswd file as an optional argument.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd_nua</B +> - The smbpasswd + backend, but with support for 'not unix accounts'. + Takes a path to the smbpasswd file as an optional argument.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#NONUNIXACCOUNTRANGE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>non unix account range</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>tdbsam</B +> - The TDB based password storage + backend. Takes a path to the TDB as an optional argument (defaults to passdb.tdb + in the <A +HREF="#PRIVATEDIR" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>private dir</I +></TT +></A +> directory.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>tdbsam_nua</B +> - The TDB based password storage + backend, with non unix account support. Takes a path to the TDB as an optional argument (defaults to passdb.tdb + in the <A +HREF="#PRIVATEDIR" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>private dir</I +></TT +></A +> directory.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#NONUNIXACCOUNTRANGE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>non unix account range</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ldapsam</B +> - The LDAP based passdb + backend. Takes an LDAP URL as an optional argument (defaults to + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ldap://localhost</B +>)</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ldapsam_nua</B +> - The LDAP based passdb + backend, with non unix account support. Takes an LDAP URL as an optional argument (defaults to + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ldap://localhost</B +>)</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#NONUNIXACCOUNTRANGE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>non unix account range</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>plugin</B +> - Allows Samba to load an + arbitary passdb backend from the .so specified as a compulsary argument. + </P +><P +>Any characters after the (optional) second : are passed to the plugin + for its own processing</P +></LI +></UL +> + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>passdb backend = smbpasswd</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>passdb backend = tdbsam:/etc/samba/private/passdb.tdb</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>passdb backend = ldapsam_nua:ldaps://ldap.example.com</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>passdb backend = plugin:/usr/local/samba/lib/my_passdb.so:my_plugin_args</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PASSWDCHAT" +></A +>passwd chat (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This string controls the <EM +>"chat"</EM +> + conversation that takes places between <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> and the local password changing + program to change the user's password. The string describes a + sequence of response-receive pairs that <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> smbd(8)</A +> uses to determine what to send to the + <A +HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd program</I +></TT +> + </A +> and what to expect back. If the expected output is not + received then the password is not changed.</P +><P +>This chat sequence is often quite site specific, depending + on what local methods are used for password control (such as NIS + etc).</P +><P +>Note that this parameter only is only used if the <A +HREF="#UNIXPASSWORDSYNC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>unix + password sync</I +></TT +></A +> parameter is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +>. This + sequence is then called <EM +>AS ROOT</EM +> when the SMB password + in the smbpasswd file is being changed, without access to the old + password cleartext. This means that root must be able to reset the user's password + without knowing the text of the previous password. In the presence of NIS/YP, + this means that the <A +HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM" +>passwd program</A +> must be + executed on the NIS master. + </P +><P +>The string can contain the macro <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%n</I +></TT +> which is substituted + for the new password. The chat sequence can also contain the standard + macros <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>\n</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>\r</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +> \t</TT +> and <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>\s</TT +> to give line-feed, + carriage-return, tab and space. The chat sequence string can also contain + a '*' which matches any sequence of characters. + Double quotes can be used to collect strings with spaces + in them into a single string.</P +><P +>If the send string in any part of the chat sequence + is a full stop ".", then no string is sent. Similarly, + if the expect string is a full stop then no string is expected.</P +><P +>If the <A +HREF="#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>pam + password change</I +></TT +></A +> parameter is set to true, the chat pairs + may be matched in any order, and success is determined by the PAM result, + not any particular output. The \n macro is ignored for PAM conversions. + </P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#UNIXPASSWORDSYNC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>unix password + sync</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> passwd program</I +></TT +></A +> ,<A +HREF="#PASSWDCHATDEBUG" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd chat debug</I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>pam password change</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>passwd chat = *new*password* %n\n + *new*password* %n\n *changed*</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>passwd chat = "*Enter OLD password*" %o\n + "*Enter NEW password*" %n\n "*Reenter NEW password*" %n\n "*Password + changed*"</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PASSWDCHATDEBUG" +></A +>passwd chat debug (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script + parameter is run in <EM +>debug</EM +> mode. In this mode the + strings passed to and received from the passwd chat are printed + in the <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> log with a + <A +HREF="#DEBUGLEVEL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>debug level</I +></TT +></A +> + of 100. This is a dangerous option as it will allow plaintext passwords + to be seen in the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> log. It is available to help + Samba admins debug their <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd chat</I +></TT +> scripts + when calling the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd program</I +></TT +> and should + be turned off after this has been done. This option has no effect if the + <A +HREF="#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>pam password change</I +></TT +></A +> + paramter is set. This parameter is off by default.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#PASSWDCHAT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd chat</I +></TT +> + </A +>, <A +HREF="#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>pam password change</I +></TT +> + </A +>, <A +HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd program</I +></TT +> + </A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>passwd chat debug = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PASSWDPROGRAM" +></A +>passwd program (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The name of a program that can be used to set + UNIX user passwords. Any occurrences of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%u</I +></TT +> + will be replaced with the user name. The user name is checked for + existence before calling the password changing program.</P +><P +>Also note that many passwd programs insist in <EM +>reasonable + </EM +> passwords, such as a minimum length, or the inclusion + of mixed case chars and digits. This can pose a problem as some clients + (such as Windows for Workgroups) uppercase the password before sending + it.</P +><P +><EM +>Note</EM +> that if the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>unix + password sync</I +></TT +> parameter is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true + </TT +> then this program is called <EM +>AS ROOT</EM +> + before the SMB password in the <A +HREF="smbpasswd.5.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbpasswd(5) + </A +> file is changed. If this UNIX password change fails, then + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will fail to change the SMB password also + (this is by design).</P +><P +>If the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>unix password sync</I +></TT +> parameter + is set this parameter <EM +>MUST USE ABSOLUTE PATHS</EM +> + for <EM +>ALL</EM +> programs called, and must be examined + for security implications. Note that by default <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>unix + password sync</I +></TT +> is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +>.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#UNIXPASSWORDSYNC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>unix + password sync</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>passwd program = /bin/passwd</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>passwd program = /sbin/npasswd %u</B +> + </P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PASSWORDLEVEL" +></A +>password level (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Some client/server combinations have difficulty + with mixed-case passwords. One offending client is Windows for + Workgroups, which for some reason forces passwords to upper + case when using the LANMAN1 protocol, but leaves them alone when + using COREPLUS! Another problem child is the Windows 95/98 + family of operating systems. These clients upper case clear + text passwords even when NT LM 0.12 selected by the protocol + negotiation request/response.</P +><P +>This parameter defines the maximum number of characters + that may be upper case in passwords.</P +><P +>For example, say the password given was "FRED". If <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> password level</I +></TT +> is set to 1, the following combinations + would be tried if "FRED" failed:</P +><P +>"Fred", "fred", "fRed", "frEd","freD"</P +><P +>If <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password level</I +></TT +> was set to 2, + the following combinations would also be tried: </P +><P +>"FRed", "FrEd", "FreD", "fREd", "fReD", "frED", ..</P +><P +>And so on.</P +><P +>The higher value this parameter is set to the more likely + it is that a mixed case password will be matched against a single + case password. However, you should be aware that use of this + parameter reduces security and increases the time taken to + process a new connection.</P +><P +>A value of zero will cause only two attempts to be + made - the password as is and the password in all-lower case.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>password level = 0</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>password level = 4</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PASSWORDSERVER" +></A +>password server (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>By specifying the name of another SMB server (such + as a WinNT box) with this option, and using <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = domain + </B +> or <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = server</B +> you can get Samba + to do all its username/password validation via a remote server.</P +><P +>This option sets the name of the password server to use. + It must be a NetBIOS name, so if the machine's NetBIOS name is + different from its Internet name then you may have to add its NetBIOS + name to the lmhosts file which is stored in the same directory + as the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file.</P +><P +>The name of the password server is looked up using the + parameter <A +HREF="#NAMERESOLVEORDER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>name + resolve order</I +></TT +></A +> and so may resolved + by any method and order described in that parameter.</P +><P +>The password server much be a machine capable of using + the "LM1.2X002" or the "NT LM 0.12" protocol, and it must be in + user level security mode.</P +><P +><EM +>NOTE:</EM +> Using a password server + means your UNIX box (running Samba) is only as secure as your + password server. <EM +>DO NOT CHOOSE A PASSWORD SERVER THAT + YOU DON'T COMPLETELY TRUST</EM +>.</P +><P +>Never point a Samba server at itself for password + serving. This will cause a loop and could lock up your Samba + server!</P +><P +>The name of the password server takes the standard + substitutions, but probably the only useful one is <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%m + </I +></TT +>, which means the Samba server will use the incoming + client as the password server. If you use this then you better + trust your clients, and you had better restrict them with hosts allow!</P +><P +>If the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security</I +></TT +> parameter is set to + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>domain</TT +>, then the list of machines in this + option must be a list of Primary or Backup Domain controllers for the + Domain or the character '*', as the Samba server is effectively + in that domain, and will use cryptographically authenticated RPC calls + to authenticate the user logging on. The advantage of using <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> security = domain</B +> is that if you list several hosts in the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password server</I +></TT +> option then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd + </B +> will try each in turn till it finds one that responds. This + is useful in case your primary server goes down.</P +><P +>If the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password server</I +></TT +> option is set + to the character '*', then Samba will attempt to auto-locate the + Primary or Backup Domain controllers to authenticate against by + doing a query for the name <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>WORKGROUP<1C></TT +> + and then contacting each server returned in the list of IP + addresses from the name resolution source. </P +><P +>If the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security</I +></TT +> parameter is + set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>server</TT +>, then there are different + restrictions that <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = domain</B +> doesn't + suffer from:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>You may list several password servers in + the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password server</I +></TT +> parameter, however if an + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> makes a connection to a password server, + and then the password server fails, no more users will be able + to be authenticated from this <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +>. This is a + restriction of the SMB/CIFS protocol when in <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = server + </B +> mode and cannot be fixed in Samba.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If you are using a Windows NT server as your + password server then you will have to ensure that your users + are able to login from the Samba server, as when in <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> security = server</B +> mode the network logon will appear to + come from there rather than from the users workstation.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#SECURITY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>password server = <empty string></B +> + </P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>password server = NT-PDC, NT-BDC1, NT-BDC2 + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>password server = *</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PATH" +></A +>path (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies a directory to which + the user of the service is to be given access. In the case of + printable services, this is where print data will spool prior to + being submitted to the host for printing.</P +><P +>For a printable service offering guest access, the service + should be readonly and the path should be world-writeable and + have the sticky bit set. This is not mandatory of course, but + you probably won't get the results you expect if you do + otherwise.</P +><P +>Any occurrences of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%u</I +></TT +> in the path + will be replaced with the UNIX username that the client is using + on this connection. Any occurrences of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%m</I +></TT +> + will be replaced by the NetBIOS name of the machine they are + connecting from. These replacements are very useful for setting + up pseudo home directories for users.</P +><P +>Note that this path will be based on <A +HREF="#ROOTDIR" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root dir</I +></TT +></A +> if one was specified.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>none</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>path = /home/fred</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="POSIXLOCKING" +></A +>posix locking (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>The <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +> + daemon maintains an database of file locks obtained by SMB clients. + The default behavior is to map this internal database to POSIX + locks. This means that file locks obtained by SMB clients are + consistent with those seen by POSIX compliant applications accessing + the files via a non-SMB method (e.g. NFS or local file access). + You should never need to disable this parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>posix locking = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="POSTEXEC" +></A +>postexec (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option specifies a command to be run + whenever the service is disconnected. It takes the usual + substitutions. The command may be run as the root on some + systems.</P +><P +>An interesting example may be to unmount server + resources:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>postexec = /etc/umount /cdrom</B +></P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#PREEXEC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preexec</I +></TT +> + </A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>none (no command executed)</EM +> + </P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>postexec = echo \"%u disconnected from %S + from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="POSTSCRIPT" +></A +>postscript (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter forces a printer to interpret + the print files as PostScript. This is done by adding a <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>%! + </TT +> to the start of print output.</P +><P +>This is most useful when you have lots of PCs that persist + in putting a control-D at the start of print jobs, which then + confuses your printer.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>postscript = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PREEXEC" +></A +>preexec (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option specifies a command to be run whenever + the service is connected to. It takes the usual substitutions.</P +><P +>An interesting example is to send the users a welcome + message every time they log in. Maybe a message of the day? Here + is an example:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>preexec = csh -c 'echo \"Welcome to %S!\" | + /usr/local/samba/bin/smbclient -M %m -I %I' & </B +></P +><P +>Of course, this could get annoying after a while :-)</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#PREEXECCLOSE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preexec close + </I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#POSTEXEC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>postexec + </I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>none (no command executed)</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>preexec = echo \"%u connected to %S from %m + (%I)\" >> /tmp/log</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PREEXECCLOSE" +></A +>preexec close (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean option controls whether a non-zero + return code from <A +HREF="#PREEXEC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preexec + </I +></TT +></A +> should close the service being connected to.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>preexec close = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PREFERREDMASTER" +></A +>preferred master (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter controls if <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> is a preferred master browser + for its workgroup.</P +><P +>If this is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>, on startup, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> + will force an election, and it will have a slight advantage in + winning the election. It is recommended that this parameter is + used in conjunction with <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +><A +HREF="#DOMAINMASTER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> domain master</I +></TT +></A +> = yes</B +>, so that <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> nmbd</B +> can guarantee becoming a domain master.</P +><P +>Use this option with caution, because if there are several + hosts (whether Samba servers, Windows 95 or NT) that are preferred + master browsers on the same subnet, they will each periodically + and continuously attempt to become the local master browser. + This will result in unnecessary broadcast traffic and reduced browsing + capabilities.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#OSLEVEL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>os level</I +></TT +> + </A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>preferred master = auto</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PREFEREDMASTER" +></A +>prefered master (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#PREFERREDMASTER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> preferred master</I +></TT +></A +> for people who cannot spell :-).</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRELOAD" +></A +>preload</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a list of services that you want to be + automatically added to the browse lists. This is most useful + for homes and printers services that would otherwise not be + visible.</P +><P +>Note that if you just want all printers in your + printcap file loaded then the <A +HREF="#LOADPRINTERS" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>load printers</I +></TT +></A +> option is easier.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>no preloaded services</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>preload = fred lp colorlp</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRESERVECASE" +></A +>preserve case (S)</DT +><DD +><P +> This controls if new filenames are created + with the case that the client passes, or if they are forced to + be the <A +HREF="#DEFAULTCASE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>default case + </I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>preserve case = yes</B +></P +><P +>See the section on <A +HREF="#AEN203" +>NAME + MANGLING</A +> for a fuller discussion.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTCOMMAND" +></A +>print command (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>After a print job has finished spooling to + a service, this command will be used via a <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>system()</B +> + call to process the spool file. Typically the command specified will + submit the spool file to the host's printing subsystem, but there + is no requirement that this be the case. The server will not remove + the spool file, so whatever command you specify should remove the + spool file when it has been processed, otherwise you will need to + manually remove old spool files.</P +><P +>The print command is simply a text string. It will be used + verbatim, with two exceptions: All occurrences of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%s + </I +></TT +> and <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%f</I +></TT +> will be replaced by the + appropriate spool file name, and all occurrences of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%p + </I +></TT +> will be replaced by the appropriate printer name. The + spool file name is generated automatically by the server. The + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%J</I +></TT +> macro can be used to access the job + name as transmitted by the client.</P +><P +>The print command <EM +>MUST</EM +> contain at least + one occurrence of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%s</I +></TT +> or <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%f + </I +></TT +> - the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%p</I +></TT +> is optional. At the time + a job is submitted, if no printer name is supplied the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%p + </I +></TT +> will be silently removed from the printer command.</P +><P +>If specified in the [global] section, the print command given + will be used for any printable service that does not have its own + print command specified.</P +><P +>If there is neither a specified print command for a + printable service nor a global print command, spool files will + be created but not processed and (most importantly) not removed.</P +><P +>Note that printing may fail on some UNIXes from the + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>nobody</TT +> account. If this happens then create + an alternative guest account that can print and set the <A +HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest account</I +></TT +></A +> + in the [global] section.</P +><P +>You can form quite complex print commands by realizing + that they are just passed to a shell. For example the following + will log a print job, print the file, then remove it. Note that + ';' is the usual separator for command in shell scripts.</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>print command = echo Printing %s >> + /tmp/print.log; lpr -P %p %s; rm %s</B +></P +><P +>You may have to vary this command considerably depending + on how you normally print files on your system. The default for + the parameter varies depending on the setting of the <A +HREF="#PRINTING" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: For <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printing = BSD, AIX, QNX, LPRNG + or PLP :</B +></P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>print command = lpr -r -P%p %s</B +></P +><P +>For <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printing = SYSV or HPUX :</B +></P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>print command = lp -c -d%p %s; rm %s</B +></P +><P +>For <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printing = SOFTQ :</B +></P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>print command = lp -d%p -s %s; rm %s</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>print command = /usr/local/samba/bin/myprintscript + %p %s</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTOK" +></A +>print ok (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#PRINTABLE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printable</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTABLE" +></A +>printable (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>If this parameter is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +>, then + clients may open, write to and submit spool files on the directory + specified for the service. </P +><P +>Note that a printable service will ALWAYS allow writing + to the service path (user privileges permitting) via the spooling + of print data. The <A +HREF="#WRITEABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>writeable + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter controls only non-printing access to + the resource.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printable = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTCAP" +></A +>printcap (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#PRINTCAPNAME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> printcap name</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTCAPNAME" +></A +>printcap name (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter may be used to override the + compiled-in default printcap name used by the server (usually <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +> /etc/printcap</TT +>). See the discussion of the <A +HREF="#AEN79" +>[printers]</A +> section above for reasons + why you might want to do this.</P +><P +>On System V systems that use <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpstat</B +> to + list available printers you can use <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printcap name = lpstat + </B +> to automatically obtain lists of available printers. This + is the default for systems that define SYSV at configure time in + Samba (this includes most System V based systems). If <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> printcap name</I +></TT +> is set to <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpstat</B +> on + these systems then Samba will launch <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpstat -v</B +> and + attempt to parse the output to obtain a printer list.</P +><P +>A minimal printcap file would look something like this:</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> print1|My Printer 1 + print2|My Printer 2 + print3|My Printer 3 + print4|My Printer 4 + print5|My Printer 5 + </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +><P +>where the '|' separates aliases of a printer. The fact + that the second alias has a space in it gives a hint to Samba + that it's a comment.</P +><P +><EM +>NOTE</EM +>: Under AIX the default printcap + name is <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/qconfig</TT +>. Samba will assume the + file is in AIX <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>qconfig</TT +> format if the string + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>qconfig</TT +> appears in the printcap filename.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printcap name = /etc/printcap</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printcap name = /etc/myprintcap</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTERADMIN" +></A +>printer admin (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a list of users that can do anything to + printers via the remote administration interfaces offered by MS-RPC + (usually using a NT workstation). Note that the root user always + has admin rights.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printer admin = <empty string></B +> + </P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printer admin = admin, @staff</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTERDRIVER" +></A +>printer driver (S)</DT +><DD +><P +><EM +>Note :</EM +>This is a deprecated + parameter and will be removed in the next major release + following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in + the <A +HREF="printer_driver2.html" +TARGET="_top" +>Samba 2.2. Printing + HOWTO</A +> for more information + on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server. + </P +><P +>This option allows you to control the string + that clients receive when they ask the server for the printer driver + associated with a printer. If you are using Windows95 or Windows NT + then you can use this to automate the setup of printers on your + system.</P +><P +>You need to set this parameter to the exact string (case + sensitive) that describes the appropriate printer driver for your + system. If you don't know the exact string to use then you should + first try with no <A +HREF="#PRINTERDRIVER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> printer driver</I +></TT +></A +> option set and the client will + give you a list of printer drivers. The appropriate strings are + shown in a scroll box after you have chosen the printer manufacturer.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#PRINTERDRIVERFILE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer + driver file</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printer driver = HP LaserJet 4L</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTERDRIVERFILE" +></A +>printer driver file (G)</DT +><DD +><P +><EM +>Note :</EM +>This is a deprecated + parameter and will be removed in the next major release + following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in + the <A +HREF="printer_driver2.html" +TARGET="_top" +>Samba 2.2. Printing + HOWTO</A +> for more information + on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server. + </P +><P +>This parameter tells Samba where the printer driver + definition file, used when serving drivers to Windows 95 clients, is + to be found. If this is not set, the default is :</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +><TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>SAMBA_INSTALL_DIRECTORY</I +></TT +> + /lib/printers.def</TT +></P +><P +>This file is created from Windows 95 <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>msprint.inf + </TT +> files found on the Windows 95 client system. For more + details on setting up serving of printer drivers to Windows 95 + clients, see the outdated documentation file in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>docs/</TT +> + directory, <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>PRINTER_DRIVER.txt</TT +>.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#PRINTERDRIVERLOCATION" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> printer driver location</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>None (set in compile).</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printer driver file = + /usr/local/samba/printers/drivers.def</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTERDRIVERLOCATION" +></A +>printer driver location (S)</DT +><DD +><P +><EM +>Note :</EM +>This is a deprecated + parameter and will be removed in the next major release + following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in + the <A +HREF="printer_driver2.html" +TARGET="_top" +>Samba 2.2. Printing + HOWTO</A +> for more information + on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server. + </P +><P +>This parameter tells clients of a particular printer + share where to find the printer driver files for the automatic + installation of drivers for Windows 95 machines. If Samba is set up + to serve printer drivers to Windows 95 machines, this should be set to</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>\\MACHINE\PRINTER$</B +></P +><P +>Where MACHINE is the NetBIOS name of your Samba server, + and PRINTER$ is a share you set up for serving printer driver + files. For more details on setting this up see the outdated documentation + file in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>docs/</TT +> directory, <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +> PRINTER_DRIVER.txt</TT +>.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#PRINTERDRIVERFILE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> printer driver file</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>none</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printer driver location = \\MACHINE\PRINTER$ + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTERNAME" +></A +>printer name (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the name of the printer + to which print jobs spooled through a printable service will be sent.</P +><P +>If specified in the [global] section, the printer + name given will be used for any printable service that does + not have its own printer name specified.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>none (but may be <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>lp</TT +> + on many systems)</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printer name = laserwriter</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTER" +></A +>printer (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#PRINTERNAME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> printer name</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTING" +></A +>printing (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameters controls how printer status + information is interpreted on your system. It also affects the + default values for the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>print command</I +></TT +>, + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lpq command</I +></TT +>, <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lppause command + </I +></TT +>, <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lpresume command</I +></TT +>, and + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lprm command</I +></TT +> if specified in the + [global] section.</P +><P +>Currently nine printing styles are supported. They are + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>BSD</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>AIX</TT +>, + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>LPRNG</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>PLP</TT +>, + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>SYSV</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>HPUX</TT +>, + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>QNX</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>SOFTQ</TT +>, + and <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>CUPS</TT +>.</P +><P +>To see what the defaults are for the other print + commands when using the various options use the <A +HREF="testparm.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +>testparm(1)</A +> program.</P +><P +>This option can be set on a per printer basis</P +><P +>See also the discussion in the <A +HREF="#AEN79" +> [printers]</A +> section.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRIVATEDIR" +></A +>private dir (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameters defines the directory + smbd will use for storing such files as <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smbpasswd</TT +> + and <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>secrets.tdb</TT +>. + </P +><P +>Default :<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>private dir = ${prefix}/private</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PROTOCOL" +></A +>protocol (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#MAXPROTOCOL" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max protocol</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PUBLIC" +></A +>public (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#GUESTOK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest + ok</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND" +></A +>queuepause command (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the command to be + executed on the server host in order to pause the printer queue.</P +><P +>This command should be a program or script which takes + a printer name as its only parameter and stops the printer queue, + such that no longer jobs are submitted to the printer.</P +><P +>This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, + but can be issued from the Printers window under Windows 95 + and NT.</P +><P +>If a <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%p</I +></TT +> is given then the printer name + is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command. + </P +><P +>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute + path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the + server.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>depends on the setting of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing + </I +></TT +></EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>queuepause command = disable %p</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="QUEUERESUMECOMMAND" +></A +>queueresume command (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the command to be + executed on the server host in order to resume the printer queue. It + is the command to undo the behavior that is caused by the + previous parameter (<A +HREF="#QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> queuepause command</I +></TT +></A +>).</P +><P +>This command should be a program or script which takes + a printer name as its only parameter and resumes the printer queue, + such that queued jobs are resubmitted to the printer.</P +><P +>This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, + but can be issued from the Printers window under Windows 95 + and NT.</P +><P +>If a <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%p</I +></TT +> is given then the printer name + is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the + command.</P +><P +>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute + path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the + server.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>depends on the setting of <A +HREF="#PRINTING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing</I +></TT +></A +></EM +> + </P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>queuepause command = enable %p + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="READBMPX" +></A +>read bmpx (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter controls whether <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> will support the "Read + Block Multiplex" SMB. This is now rarely used and defaults to + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +>. You should never need to set this + parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>read bmpx = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="READLIST" +></A +>read list (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a list of users that are given read-only + access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list then + they will not be given write access, no matter what the <A +HREF="#WRITEABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>writeable</I +></TT +></A +> + option is set to. The list can include group names using the + syntax described in the <A +HREF="#INVALIDUSERS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> invalid users</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#WRITELIST" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> write list</I +></TT +></A +> parameter and the <A +HREF="#INVALIDUSERS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>invalid users</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>read list = <empty string></B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>read list = mary, @students</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="READONLY" +></A +>read only (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Note that this is an inverted synonym for <A +HREF="#WRITEABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>writeable</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="READRAW" +></A +>read raw (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter controls whether or not the server + will support the raw read SMB requests when transferring data + to clients.</P +><P +>If enabled, raw reads allow reads of 65535 bytes in + one packet. This typically provides a major performance benefit. + </P +><P +>However, some clients either negotiate the allowable + block size incorrectly or are incapable of supporting larger block + sizes, and for these clients you may need to disable raw reads.</P +><P +>In general this parameter should be viewed as a system tuning + tool and left severely alone. See also <A +HREF="#WRITERAW" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>write raw</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>read raw = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="READSIZE" +></A +>read size (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The option <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>read size</I +></TT +> + affects the overlap of disk reads/writes with network reads/writes. + If the amount of data being transferred in several of the SMB + commands (currently SMBwrite, SMBwriteX and SMBreadbraw) is larger + than this value then the server begins writing the data before it + has received the whole packet from the network, or in the case of + SMBreadbraw, it begins writing to the network before all the data + has been read from disk.</P +><P +>This overlapping works best when the speeds of disk and + network access are similar, having very little effect when the + speed of one is much greater than the other.</P +><P +>The default value is 16384, but very little experimentation + has been done yet to determine the optimal value, and it is likely + that the best value will vary greatly between systems anyway. + A value over 65536 is pointless and will cause you to allocate + memory unnecessarily.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>read size = 16384</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>read size = 8192</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="REMOTEANNOUNCE" +></A +>remote announce (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows you to setup <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> to periodically announce itself + to arbitrary IP addresses with an arbitrary workgroup name.</P +><P +>This is useful if you want your Samba server to appear + in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse propagation + rules don't work. The remote workgroup can be anywhere that you + can send IP packets to.</P +><P +>For example:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>remote announce = 192.168.2.255/SERVERS + 192.168.4.255/STAFF</B +></P +><P +>the above line would cause <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> to announce itself + to the two given IP addresses using the given workgroup names. + If you leave out the workgroup name then the one given in + the <A +HREF="#WORKGROUP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>workgroup</I +></TT +></A +> + parameter is used instead.</P +><P +>The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast + addresses of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses + of known browse masters if your network config is that stable.</P +><P +>See the documentation file <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>BROWSING.txt</TT +> + in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>docs/</TT +> directory.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>remote announce = <empty string> + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="REMOTEBROWSESYNC" +></A +>remote browse sync (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows you to setup <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> to periodically request + synchronization of browse lists with the master browser of a Samba + server that is on a remote segment. This option will allow you to + gain browse lists for multiple workgroups across routed networks. This + is done in a manner that does not work with any non-Samba servers.</P +><P +>This is useful if you want your Samba server and all local + clients to appear in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse + propagation rules don't work. The remote workgroup can be anywhere + that you can send IP packets to.</P +><P +>For example:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>remote browse sync = 192.168.2.255 192.168.4.255 + </B +></P +><P +>the above line would cause <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> to request + the master browser on the specified subnets or addresses to + synchronize their browse lists with the local server.</P +><P +>The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast + addresses of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses + of known browse masters if your network config is that stable. If + a machine IP address is given Samba makes NO attempt to validate + that the remote machine is available, is listening, nor that it + is in fact the browse master on its segment.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>remote browse sync = <empty string> + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="RESTRICTANONYMOUS" +></A +>restrict anonymous (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a boolean parameter. If it is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>, then + anonymous access to the server will be restricted, namely in the + case where the server is expecting the client to send a username, + but it doesn't. Setting it to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +> will force these anonymous + connections to be denied, and the client will be required to always + supply a username and password when connecting. Use of this parameter + is only recommended for homogeneous NT client environments.</P +><P +>This parameter makes the use of macro expansions that rely + on the username (%U, %G, etc) consistent. NT 4.0 + likes to use anonymous connections when refreshing the share list, + and this is a way to work around that.</P +><P +>When restrict anonymous is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>, all anonymous connections + are denied no matter what they are for. This can effect the ability + of a machine to access the Samba Primary Domain Controller to revalidate + its machine account after someone else has logged on the client + interactively. The NT client will display a message saying that + the machine's account in the domain doesn't exist or the password is + bad. The best way to deal with this is to reboot NT client machines + between interactive logons, using "Shutdown and Restart", rather + than "Close all programs and logon as a different user".</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>restrict anonymous = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ROOT" +></A +>root (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#ROOTDIRECTORY" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root directory"</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ROOTDIR" +></A +>root dir (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#ROOTDIRECTORY" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root directory"</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ROOTDIRECTORY" +></A +>root directory (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The server will <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>chroot()</B +> (i.e. + Change its root directory) to this directory on startup. This is + not strictly necessary for secure operation. Even without it the + server will deny access to files not in one of the service entries. + It may also check for, and deny access to, soft links to other + parts of the filesystem, or attempts to use ".." in file names + to access other directories (depending on the setting of the <A +HREF="#WIDELINKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>wide links</I +></TT +></A +> + parameter).</P +><P +>Adding a <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root directory</I +></TT +> entry other + than "/" adds an extra level of security, but at a price. It + absolutely ensures that no access is given to files not in the + sub-tree specified in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root directory</I +></TT +> + option, <EM +>including</EM +> some files needed for + complete operation of the server. To maintain full operability + of the server you will need to mirror some system files + into the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root directory</I +></TT +> tree. In particular + you will need to mirror <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd</TT +> (or a + subset of it), and any binaries or configuration files needed for + printing (if required). The set of files that must be mirrored is + operating system dependent.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>root directory = /</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>root directory = /homes/smb</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ROOTPOSTEXEC" +></A +>root postexec (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is the same as the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>postexec</I +></TT +> + parameter except that the command is run as root. This + is useful for unmounting filesystems + (such as CDROMs) after a connection is closed.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#POSTEXEC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> postexec</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>root postexec = <empty string> + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ROOTPREEXEC" +></A +>root preexec (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is the same as the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preexec</I +></TT +> + parameter except that the command is run as root. This + is useful for mounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) when a + connection is opened.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#PREEXEC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> preexec</I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#PREEXECCLOSE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preexec close</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>root preexec = <empty string> + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ROOTPREEXECCLOSE" +></A +>root preexec close (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is the same as the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preexec close + </I +></TT +> parameter except that the command is run as root.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#PREEXEC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> preexec</I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#PREEXECCLOSE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preexec close</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>root preexec close = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SECURITY" +></A +>security (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option affects how clients respond to + Samba and is one of the most important settings in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +> smb.conf</TT +> file.</P +><P +>The option sets the "security mode bit" in replies to + protocol negotiations with <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8) + </A +> to turn share level security on or off. Clients decide + based on this bit whether (and how) to transfer user and password + information to the server.</P +><P +>The default is <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = user</B +>, as this is + the most common setting needed when talking to Windows 98 and + Windows NT.</P +><P +>The alternatives are <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = share</B +>, + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = server</B +> or <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = domain + </B +>.</P +><P +>In versions of Samba prior to 2.0.0, the default was + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = share</B +> mainly because that was + the only option at one stage.</P +><P +>There is a bug in WfWg that has relevance to this + setting. When in user or server level security a WfWg client + will totally ignore the password you type in the "connect + drive" dialog box. This makes it very difficult (if not impossible) + to connect to a Samba service as anyone except the user that + you are logged into WfWg as.</P +><P +>If your PCs use usernames that are the same as their + usernames on the UNIX machine then you will want to use + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = user</B +>. If you mostly use usernames + that don't exist on the UNIX box then use <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = + share</B +>.</P +><P +>You should also use <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = share</B +> if you + want to mainly setup shares without a password (guest shares). This + is commonly used for a shared printer server. It is more difficult + to setup guest shares with <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = user</B +>, see + the <A +HREF="#MAPTOGUEST" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map to guest</I +></TT +> + </A +>parameter for details.</P +><P +>It is possible to use <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> in a <EM +> hybrid mode</EM +> where it is offers both user and share + level security under different <A +HREF="#NETBIOSALIASES" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>NetBIOS aliases</I +></TT +></A +>. </P +><P +>The different settings will now be explained.</P +><P +><A +NAME="SECURITYEQUALSSHARE" +></A +><EM +>SECURITY = SHARE + </EM +></P +><P +>When clients connect to a share level security server they + need not log onto the server with a valid username and password before + attempting to connect to a shared resource (although modern clients + such as Windows 95/98 and Windows NT will send a logon request with + a username but no password when talking to a <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = share + </B +> server). Instead, the clients send authentication information + (passwords) on a per-share basis, at the time they attempt to connect + to that share.</P +><P +>Note that <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> <EM +>ALWAYS</EM +> + uses a valid UNIX user to act on behalf of the client, even in + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = share</B +> level security.</P +><P +>As clients are not required to send a username to the server + in share level security, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> uses several + techniques to determine the correct UNIX user to use on behalf + of the client.</P +><P +>A list of possible UNIX usernames to match with the given + client password is constructed using the following methods :</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>If the <A +HREF="#GUESTONLY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest + only</I +></TT +></A +> parameter is set, then all the other + stages are missed and only the <A +HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest account</I +></TT +></A +> username is checked. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Is a username is sent with the share connection + request, then this username (after mapping - see <A +HREF="#USERNAMEMAP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>username map</I +></TT +></A +>), + is added as a potential username.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If the client did a previous <EM +>logon + </EM +> request (the SessionSetup SMB call) then the + username sent in this SMB will be added as a potential username. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>The name of the service the client requested is + added as a potential username.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>The NetBIOS name of the client is added to + the list as a potential username.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Any users on the <A +HREF="#USER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> user</I +></TT +></A +> list are added as potential usernames. + </P +></LI +></UL +><P +>If the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest only</I +></TT +> parameter is + not set, then this list is then tried with the supplied password. + The first user for whom the password matches will be used as the + UNIX user.</P +><P +>If the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest only</I +></TT +> parameter is + set, or no username can be determined then if the share is marked + as available to the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest account</I +></TT +>, then this + guest user will be used, otherwise access is denied.</P +><P +>Note that it can be <EM +>very</EM +> confusing + in share-level security as to which UNIX username will eventually + be used in granting access.</P +><P +>See also the section <A +HREF="#AEN236" +> NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A +>.</P +><P +><A +NAME="SECURITYEQUALSUSER" +></A +><EM +>SECURITY = USER + </EM +></P +><P +>This is the default security setting in Samba 2.2. + With user-level security a client must first "log-on" with a + valid username and password (which can be mapped using the <A +HREF="#USERNAMEMAP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>username map</I +></TT +></A +> + parameter). Encrypted passwords (see the <A +HREF="#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>encrypted passwords</I +></TT +></A +> parameter) can also + be used in this security mode. Parameters such as <A +HREF="#USER" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>user</I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#GUESTONLY" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest only</I +></TT +></A +> if set are then applied and + may change the UNIX user to use on this connection, but only after + the user has been successfully authenticated.</P +><P +><EM +>Note</EM +> that the name of the resource being + requested is <EM +>not</EM +> sent to the server until after + the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why + guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing + the server to automatically map unknown users into the <A +HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest account</I +></TT +></A +>. + See the <A +HREF="#MAPTOGUEST" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map to guest</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter for details on doing this.</P +><P +>See also the section <A +HREF="#AEN236" +> NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A +>.</P +><P +><A +NAME="SECURITYEQUALSSERVER" +></A +><EM +>SECURITY = SERVER + </EM +></P +><P +>In this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password + by passing it to another SMB server, such as an NT box. If this + fails it will revert to <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = user</B +>, but note + that if encrypted passwords have been negotiated then Samba cannot + revert back to checking the UNIX password file, it must have a valid + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smbpasswd</TT +> file to check users against. See the + documentation file in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>docs/</TT +> directory + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>ENCRYPTION.txt</TT +> for details on how to set this + up.</P +><P +><EM +>Note</EM +> that from the client's point of + view <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = server</B +> is the same as <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> security = user</B +>. It only affects how the server deals + with the authentication, it does not in any way affect what the + client sees.</P +><P +><EM +>Note</EM +> that the name of the resource being + requested is <EM +>not</EM +> sent to the server until after + the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why + guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing + the server to automatically map unknown users into the <A +HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest account</I +></TT +></A +>. + See the <A +HREF="#MAPTOGUEST" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map to guest</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter for details on doing this.</P +><P +>See also the section <A +HREF="#AEN236" +> NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A +>.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password + server</I +></TT +></A +> parameter and the <A +HREF="#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>encrypted passwords</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter.</P +><P +><A +NAME="SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN" +></A +><EM +>SECURITY = DOMAIN + </EM +></P +><P +>This mode will only work correctly if <A +HREF="smbpasswd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbpasswd(8)</A +> has been used to add this + machine into a Windows NT Domain. It expects the <A +HREF="#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>encrypted passwords</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter to be set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>. In this + mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing + it to a Windows NT Primary or Backup Domain Controller, in exactly + the same way that a Windows NT Server would do.</P +><P +><EM +>Note</EM +> that a valid UNIX user must still + exist as well as the account on the Domain Controller to allow + Samba to have a valid UNIX account to map file access to.</P +><P +><EM +>Note</EM +> that from the client's point + of view <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = domain</B +> is the same as <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = user + </B +>. It only affects how the server deals with the authentication, + it does not in any way affect what the client sees.</P +><P +><EM +>Note</EM +> that the name of the resource being + requested is <EM +>not</EM +> sent to the server until after + the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why + guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing + the server to automatically map unknown users into the <A +HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest account</I +></TT +></A +>. + See the <A +HREF="#MAPTOGUEST" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map to guest</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter for details on doing this.</P +><P +><EM +>BUG:</EM +> There is currently a bug in the + implementation of <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = domain</B +> with respect + to multi-byte character set usernames. The communication with a + Domain Controller must be done in UNICODE and Samba currently + does not widen multi-byte user names to UNICODE correctly, thus + a multi-byte username will not be recognized correctly at the + Domain Controller. This issue will be addressed in a future release.</P +><P +>See also the section <A +HREF="#AEN236" +> NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A +>.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password + server</I +></TT +></A +> parameter and the <A +HREF="#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>encrypted passwords</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = USER</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = DOMAIN</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SECURITYMASK" +></A +>security mask (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter controls what UNIX permission + bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating + the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security + dialog box.</P +><P +>This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to + the changed permission bits, thus preventing any bits not in + this mask from being modified. Essentially, zero bits in this + mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed + to change.</P +><P +>If not set explicitly this parameter is 0777, allowing + a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file. + </P +><P +><EM +>Note</EM +> that users who can access the + Samba server through other means can easily bypass this + restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone + "appliance" systems. Administrators of most normal systems will + probably want to leave it set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>0777</TT +>.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory security mode</I +></TT +></A +>, + <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory + security mask</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#FORCESECURITYMODE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force security mode</I +></TT +></A +> parameters.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security mask = 0777</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security mask = 0770</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SERVERSTRING" +></A +>server string (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls what string will show up in the + printer comment box in print manager and next to the IPC connection + in <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>net view</B +>. It can be any string that you wish + to show to your users.</P +><P +>It also sets what will appear in browse lists next + to the machine name.</P +><P +>A <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%v</I +></TT +> will be replaced with the Samba + version number.</P +><P +>A <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%h</I +></TT +> will be replaced with the + hostname.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>server string = Samba %v</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>server string = University of GNUs Samba + Server</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SETDIRECTORY" +></A +>set directory (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>If <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>set directory = no</B +>, then + users of the service may not use the setdir command to change + directory.</P +><P +>The <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>setdir</B +> command is only implemented + in the Digital Pathworks client. See the Pathworks documentation + for details.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>set directory = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SHORTPRESERVECASE" +></A +>short preserve case (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter controls if new files + which conform to 8.3 syntax, that is all in upper case and of + suitable length, are created upper case, or if they are forced + to be the <A +HREF="#DEFAULTCASE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>default case + </I +></TT +></A +>. This option can be use with <A +HREF="#PRESERVECASE" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>preserve case = yes</B +> + </A +> to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short + names are lowered. </P +><P +>See the section on <A +HREF="#AEN203" +> NAME MANGLING</A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>short preserve case = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD" +></A +>show add printer wizard (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support + for Windows NT/2000 client in Samba 2.2, a "Printers..." folder will + appear on Samba hosts in the share listing. Normally this folder will + contain an icon for the MS Add Printer Wizard (APW). However, it is + possible to disable this feature regardless of the level of privilege + of the connected user.</P +><P +>Under normal circumstances, the Windows NT/2000 client will + open a handle on the printer server with OpenPrinterEx() asking for + Administrator privileges. If the user does not have administrative + access on the print server (i.e is not root or a member of the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer admin</I +></TT +> group), the OpenPrinterEx() + call fails and the client makes another open call with a request for + a lower privilege level. This should succeed, however the APW + icon will not be displayed.</P +><P +>Disabling the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>show add printer wizard</I +></TT +> + parameter will always cause the OpenPrinterEx() on the server + to fail. Thus the APW icon will never be displayed. <EM +> Note :</EM +>This does not prevent the same user from having + administrative privilege on an individual printer.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>addprinter + command</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>deleteprinter command</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#PRINTERADMIN" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer admin</I +></TT +></A +></P +><P +>Default :<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>show add printer wizard = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SHUTDOWNSCRIPT" +></A +>shutdown script (G)</DT +><DD +><P +><EM +>This parameter only exists in the HEAD cvs branch</EM +> + This a full path name to a script called by + <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +> that + should start a shutdown procedure.</P +><P +>This command will be run as the user connected to the + server.</P +><P +>%m %t %r %f parameters are expanded</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%m</I +></TT +> will be substituted with the + shutdown message sent to the server.</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%t</I +></TT +> will be substituted with the + number of seconds to wait before effectively starting the + shutdown procedure.</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%r</I +></TT +> will be substituted with the + switch <EM +>-r</EM +>. It means reboot after shutdown + for NT. + </P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%f</I +></TT +> will be substituted with the + switch <EM +>-f</EM +>. It means force the shutdown + even if applications do not respond for NT.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>None</EM +>.</P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>abort shutdown script = /usr/local/samba/sbin/shutdown %m %t %r %f</B +></P +><P +>Shutdown script example: + <TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> #!/bin/bash + + $time=0 + let "time/60" + let "time++" + + /sbin/shutdown $3 $4 +$time $1 & + </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +> + Shutdown does not return so we need to launch it in background. + </P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#ABORTSHUTDOWNSCRIPT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>abort shutdown script</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SMBPASSWDFILE" +></A +>smb passwd file (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option sets the path to the encrypted + smbpasswd file. By default the path to the smbpasswd file + is compiled into Samba.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smb passwd file = ${prefix}/private/smbpasswd + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smb passwd file = /etc/samba/smbpasswd + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SOCKETADDRESS" +></A +>socket address (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows you to control what + address Samba will listen for connections on. This is used to + support multiple virtual interfaces on the one server, each + with a different configuration.</P +><P +>By default Samba will accept connections on any + address.</P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>socket address = 192.168.2.20</B +> + </P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SOCKETOPTIONS" +></A +>socket options (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows you to set socket options + to be used when talking with the client.</P +><P +>Socket options are controls on the networking layer + of the operating systems which allow the connection to be + tuned.</P +><P +>This option will typically be used to tune your Samba + server for optimal performance for your local network. There is + no way that Samba can know what the optimal parameters are for + your net, so you must experiment and choose them yourself. We + strongly suggest you read the appropriate documentation for your + operating system first (perhaps <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>man setsockopt</B +> + will help).</P +><P +>You may find that on some systems Samba will say + "Unknown socket option" when you supply an option. This means you + either incorrectly typed it or you need to add an include file + to includes.h for your OS. If the latter is the case please + send the patch to <A +HREF="mailto:samba@samba.org" +TARGET="_top" +> samba@samba.org</A +>.</P +><P +>Any of the supported socket options may be combined + in any way you like, as long as your OS allows it.</P +><P +>This is the list of socket options currently settable + using this option:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>SO_KEEPALIVE</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>SO_REUSEADDR</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>SO_BROADCAST</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>TCP_NODELAY</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>IPTOS_LOWDELAY</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>IPTOS_THROUGHPUT</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>SO_SNDBUF *</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>SO_RCVBUF *</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>SO_SNDLOWAT *</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>SO_RCVLOWAT *</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>Those marked with a <EM +>'*'</EM +> take an integer + argument. The others can optionally take a 1 or 0 argument to enable + or disable the option, by default they will be enabled if you + don't specify 1 or 0.</P +><P +>To specify an argument use the syntax SOME_OPTION = VALUE + for example <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>SO_SNDBUF = 8192</B +>. Note that you must + not have any spaces before or after the = sign.</P +><P +>If you are on a local network then a sensible option + might be</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY</B +></P +><P +>If you have a local network then you could try:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY TCP_NODELAY</B +></P +><P +>If you are on a wide area network then perhaps try + setting IPTOS_THROUGHPUT. </P +><P +>Note that several of the options may cause your Samba + server to fail completely. Use these options with caution!</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>socket options = TCP_NODELAY</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SOURCEENVIRONMENT" +></A +>source environment (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter causes Samba to set environment + variables as per the content of the file named.</P +><P +>If the value of this parameter starts with a "|" character + then Samba will treat that value as a pipe command to open and + will set the environment variables from the output of the pipe.</P +><P +>The contents of the file or the output of the pipe should + be formatted as the output of the standard Unix <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>env(1) + </B +> command. This is of the form :</P +><P +>Example environment entry:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>SAMBA_NETBIOS_NAME = myhostname</B +></P +><P +>Default: <EM +>No default value</EM +></P +><P +>Examples: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>source environment = |/etc/smb.conf.sh + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>source environment = + /usr/local/smb_env_vars</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSL" +></A +>ssl (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +>This variable enables or disables the entire SSL mode. If + it is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +>, the SSL-enabled Samba behaves + exactly like the non-SSL Samba. If set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +>, + it depends on the variables <A +HREF="#SSLHOSTS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> ssl hosts</I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#SSLHOSTSRESIGN" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl hosts resign</I +></TT +></A +> whether an SSL + connection will be required.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLCACERTDIR" +></A +>ssl CA certDir (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +>This variable defines where to look up the Certification + Authorities. The given directory should contain one file for + each CA that Samba will trust. The file name must be the hash + value over the "Distinguished Name" of the CA. How this directory + is set up is explained later in this document. All files within the + directory that don't fit into this naming scheme are ignored. You + don't need this variable if you don't verify client certificates.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl CA certDir = /usr/local/ssl/certs + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLCACERTFILE" +></A +>ssl CA certFile (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +>This variable is a second way to define the trusted CAs. + The certificates of the trusted CAs are collected in one big + file and this variable points to the file. You will probably + only use one of the two ways to define your CAs. The first choice is + preferable if you have many CAs or want to be flexible, the second + is preferable if you only have one CA and want to keep things + simple (you won't need to create the hashed file names). You + don't need this variable if you don't verify client certificates.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl CA certFile = /usr/local/ssl/certs/trustedCAs.pem + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLCIPHERS" +></A +>ssl ciphers (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +>This variable defines the ciphers that should be offered + during SSL negotiation. You should not set this variable unless + you know what you are doing.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLCLIENTCERT" +></A +>ssl client cert (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +>The certificate in this file is used by <A +HREF="smbclient.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbclient(1)</B +></A +> if it exists. It's needed + if the server requires a client certificate.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl client cert = /usr/local/ssl/certs/smbclient.pem + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLCLIENTKEY" +></A +>ssl client key (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +>This is the private key for <A +HREF="smbclient.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbclient(1)</B +></A +>. It's only needed if the + client should have a certificate. </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl client key = /usr/local/ssl/private/smbclient.pem + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLCOMPATIBILITY" +></A +>ssl compatibility (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +>This variable defines whether OpenSSL should be configured + for bug compatibility with other SSL implementations. This is + probably not desirable because currently no clients with SSL + implementations other than OpenSSL exist.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl compatibility = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLEGDSOCKET" +></A +>ssl egd socket (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +> This option is used to define the location of the communiation socket of + an EGD or PRNGD daemon, from which entropy can be retrieved. This option + can be used instead of or together with the <A +HREF="#SSLENTROPYFILE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl entropy file</I +></TT +></A +> + directive. 255 bytes of entropy will be retrieved from the daemon. + </P +><P +>Default: <EM +>none</EM +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLENTROPYBYTES" +></A +>ssl entropy bytes (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +> This parameter is used to define the number of bytes which should + be read from the <A +HREF="#SSLENTROPYFILE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl entropy + file</I +></TT +></A +> If a -1 is specified, the entire file will + be read. + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl entropy bytes = 255</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLENTROPYFILE" +></A +>ssl entropy file (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +> This parameter is used to specify a file from which processes will + read "random bytes" on startup. In order to seed the internal pseudo + random number generator, entropy must be provided. On system with a + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/dev/urandom</TT +> device file, the processes + will retrieve its entropy from the kernel. On systems without kernel + entropy support, a file can be supplied that will be read on startup + and that will be used to seed the PRNG. + </P +><P +>Default: <EM +>none</EM +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLHOSTS" +></A +>ssl hosts (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>See <A +HREF="#SSLHOSTSRESIGN" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> ssl hosts resign</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLHOSTSRESIGN" +></A +>ssl hosts resign (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +>These two variables define whether Samba will go + into SSL mode or not. If none of them is defined, Samba will + allow only SSL connections. If the <A +HREF="#SSLHOSTS" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl hosts</I +></TT +></A +> variable lists + hosts (by IP-address, IP-address range, net group or name), + only these hosts will be forced into SSL mode. If the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> ssl hosts resign</I +></TT +> variable lists hosts, only these + hosts will <EM +>NOT</EM +> be forced into SSL mode. The syntax for these two + variables is the same as for the <A +HREF="#HOSTSALLOW" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> hosts allow</I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#HOSTSDENY" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts deny</I +></TT +></A +> pair of variables, only + that the subject of the decision is different: It's not the access + right but whether SSL is used or not. </P +><P +>The example below requires SSL connections from all hosts + outside the local net (which is 192.168.*.*).</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl hosts = <empty string></B +></P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl hosts resign = <empty string></B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl hosts resign = 192.168.</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLREQUIRECLIENTCERT" +></A +>ssl require clientcert (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +>If this variable is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +>, the + server will not tolerate connections from clients that don't + have a valid certificate. The directory/file given in <A +HREF="#SSLCACERTDIR" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl CA certDir</I +></TT +> + </A +> and <A +HREF="#SSLCACERTFILE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl CA certFile + </I +></TT +></A +> will be used to look up the CAs that issued + the client's certificate. If the certificate can't be verified + positively, the connection will be terminated. If this variable + is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +>, clients don't need certificates. + Contrary to web applications you really <EM +>should</EM +> + require client certificates. In the web environment the client's + data is sensitive (credit card numbers) and the server must prove + to be trustworthy. In a file server environment the server's data + will be sensitive and the clients must prove to be trustworthy.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl require clientcert = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLREQUIRESERVERCERT" +></A +>ssl require servercert (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +>If this variable is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +>, the + <A +HREF="smbclient.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbclient(1)</B +> + </A +> will request a certificate from the server. Same as + <A +HREF="#SSLREQUIRECLIENTCERT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl require + clientcert</I +></TT +></A +> for the server.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl require servercert = no</B +> + </P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLSERVERCERT" +></A +>ssl server cert (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +>This is the file containing the server's certificate. + The server <EM +>must</EM +> have a certificate. The + file may also contain the server's private key. See later for + how certificates and private keys are created.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl server cert = <empty string> + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLSERVERKEY" +></A +>ssl server key (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +>This file contains the private key of the server. If + this variable is not defined, the key is looked up in the + certificate file (it may be appended to the certificate). + The server <EM +>must</EM +> have a private key + and the certificate <EM +>must</EM +> + match this private key.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl server key = <empty string> + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLVERSION" +></A +>ssl version (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +>This enumeration variable defines the versions of the + SSL protocol that will be used. <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>ssl2or3</TT +> allows + dynamic negotiation of SSL v2 or v3, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>ssl2</TT +> results + in SSL v2, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>ssl3</TT +> results in SSL v3 and + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>tls1</TT +> results in TLS v1. TLS (Transport Layer + Security) is the new standard for SSL.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl version = "ssl2or3"</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="STATCACHE" +></A +>stat cache (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter determines if <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> will use a cache in order to + speed up case insensitive name mappings. You should never need + to change this parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>stat cache = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="STATCACHESIZE" +></A +>stat cache size (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter determines the number of + entries in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>stat cache</I +></TT +>. You should + never need to change this parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>stat cache size = 50</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="STATUS" +></A +>status (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This enables or disables logging of connections + to a status file that <A +HREF="smbstatus.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbstatus(1)</A +> + can read.</P +><P +>With this disabled <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbstatus</B +> won't be able + to tell you what connections are active. You should never need to + change this parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>status = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="STRICTALLOCATE" +></A +>strict allocate (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a boolean that controls the handling of + disk space allocation in the server. When this is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +> + the server will change from UNIX behaviour of not committing real + disk storage blocks when a file is extended to the Windows behaviour + of actually forcing the disk system to allocate real storage blocks + when a file is created or extended to be a given size. In UNIX + terminology this means that Samba will stop creating sparse files. + This can be slow on some systems.</P +><P +>When strict allocate is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +> the server does sparse + disk block allocation when a file is extended.</P +><P +>Setting this to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +> can help Samba return + out of quota messages on systems that are restricting the disk quota + of users.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>strict allocate = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="STRICTLOCKING" +></A +>strict locking (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a boolean that controls the handling of + file locking in the server. When this is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +> + the server will check every read and write access for file locks, and + deny access if locks exist. This can be slow on some systems.</P +><P +>When strict locking is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +> the server does file + lock checks only when the client explicitly asks for them.</P +><P +>Well-behaved clients always ask for lock checks when it + is important, so in the vast majority of cases <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>strict + locking = no</B +> is preferable.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>strict locking = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="STRICTSYNC" +></A +>strict sync (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Many Windows applications (including the Windows + 98 explorer shell) seem to confuse flushing buffer contents to + disk with doing a sync to disk. Under UNIX, a sync call forces + the process to be suspended until the kernel has ensured that + all outstanding data in kernel disk buffers has been safely stored + onto stable storage. This is very slow and should only be done + rarely. Setting this parameter to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +> (the + default) means that <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> ignores the Windows applications requests for + a sync call. There is only a possibility of losing data if the + operating system itself that Samba is running on crashes, so there is + little danger in this default setting. In addition, this fixes many + performance problems that people have reported with the new Windows98 + explorer shell file copies.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#SYNCALWAYS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>sync + always></I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>strict sync = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="STRIPDOT" +></A +>strip dot (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a boolean that controls whether to + strip trailing dots off UNIX filenames. This helps with some + CDROMs that have filenames ending in a single dot.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>strip dot = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SYNCALWAYS" +></A +>sync always (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a boolean parameter that controls + whether writes will always be written to stable storage before + the write call returns. If this is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +> then the server will be + guided by the client's request in each write call (clients can + set a bit indicating that a particular write should be synchronous). + If this is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +> then every write will be followed by a <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>fsync() + </B +> call to ensure the data is written to disk. Note that + the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>strict sync</I +></TT +> parameter must be set to + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +> in order for this parameter to have + any affect.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#STRICTSYNC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>strict + sync</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>sync always = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SYSLOG" +></A +>syslog (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter maps how Samba debug messages + are logged onto the system syslog logging levels. Samba debug + level zero maps onto syslog <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>LOG_ERR</TT +>, debug + level one maps onto <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>LOG_WARNING</TT +>, debug level + two maps onto <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>LOG_NOTICE</TT +>, debug level three + maps onto LOG_INFO. All higher levels are mapped to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +> LOG_DEBUG</TT +>.</P +><P +>This parameter sets the threshold for sending messages + to syslog. Only messages with debug level less than this value + will be sent to syslog.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>syslog = 1</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SYSLOGONLY" +></A +>syslog only (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>If this parameter is set then Samba debug + messages are logged into the system syslog only, and not to + the debug log files.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>syslog only = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="TEMPLATEHOMEDIR" +></A +>template homedir (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT + user, the <A +HREF="winbindd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>winbindd(8)</A +> daemon + uses this parameter to fill in the home directory for that user. + If the string <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%D</I +></TT +> is present it is substituted + with the user's Windows NT domain name. If the string <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%U + </I +></TT +> is present it is substituted with the user's Windows + NT user name.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>template homedir = /home/%D/%U</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="TEMPLATESHELL" +></A +>template shell (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT + user, the <A +HREF="winbindd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>winbindd(8)</A +> daemon + uses this parameter to fill in the login shell for that user.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>template shell = /bin/false</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="TIMEOFFSET" +></A +>time offset (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter is a setting in minutes to add + to the normal GMT to local time conversion. This is useful if + you are serving a lot of PCs that have incorrect daylight + saving time handling.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>time offset = 0</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>time offset = 60</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="TIMESERVER" +></A +>time server (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter determines if <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> + nmbd(8)</A +> advertises itself as a time server to Windows + clients.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>time server = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="TIMESTAMPLOGS" +></A +>timestamp logs (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> debug timestamp</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="TOTALPRINTJOBS" +></A +>total print jobs (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter accepts an integer value which defines + a limit on the maximum number of print jobs that will be accepted + system wide at any given time. If a print job is submitted + by a client which will exceed this number, then <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> will return an + error indicating that no space is available on the server. The + default value of 0 means that no such limit exists. This parameter + can be used to prevent a server from exceeding its capacity and is + designed as a printing throttle. See also + <A +HREF="#MAXPRINTJOBS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max print jobs</I +></TT +></A +>. + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>total print jobs = 0</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>total print jobs = 5000</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="UNIXEXTENSIONS" +></A +>unix extensions(G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba + implments the CIFS UNIX extensions, as defined by HP. These + extensions enable CIFS to server UNIX clients to UNIX servers + better, and allow such things as symbolic links, hard links etc. + These extensions require a similarly enabled client, and are of + no current use to Windows clients.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>unix extensions = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="UNIXPASSWORDSYNC" +></A +>unix password sync (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba + attempts to synchronize the UNIX password with the SMB password + when the encrypted SMB password in the smbpasswd file is changed. + If this is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +> the program specified in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd + program</I +></TT +>parameter is called <EM +>AS ROOT</EM +> - + to allow the new UNIX password to be set without access to the + old UNIX password (as the SMB password change code has no + access to the old password cleartext, only the new).</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd + program</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#PASSWDCHAT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> passwd chat</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>unix password sync = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="UPDATEENCRYPTED" +></A +>update encrypted (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter allows a user logging + on with a plaintext password to have their encrypted (hashed) + password in the smbpasswd file to be updated automatically as + they log on. This option allows a site to migrate from plaintext + password authentication (users authenticate with plaintext + password over the wire, and are checked against a UNIX account + database) to encrypted password authentication (the SMB + challenge/response authentication mechanism) without forcing + all users to re-enter their passwords via smbpasswd at the time the + change is made. This is a convenience option to allow the change over + to encrypted passwords to be made over a longer period. Once all users + have encrypted representations of their passwords in the smbpasswd + file this parameter should be set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +>.</P +><P +>In order for this parameter to work correctly the <A +HREF="#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>encrypt passwords</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter must be set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +> when + this parameter is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +>.</P +><P +>Note that even when this parameter is set a user + authenticating to <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> must still enter a valid + password in order to connect correctly, and to update their hashed + (smbpasswd) passwords.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>update encrypted = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="USECLIENTDRIVER" +></A +>use client driver (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter applies only to Windows NT/2000 + clients. It has no affect on Windows 95/98/ME clients. When + serving a printer to Windows NT/2000 clients without first installing + a valid printer driver on the Samba host, the client will be required + to install a local printer driver. From this point on, the client + will treat the print as a local printer and not a network printer + connection. This is much the same behavior that will occur + when <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>disable spoolss = yes</B +>. </P +><P +>The differentiating + factor is that under normal circumstances, the NT/2000 client will + attempt to open the network printer using MS-RPC. The problem is that + because the client considers the printer to be local, it will attempt + to issue the OpenPrinterEx() call requesting access rights associated + with the logged on user. If the user possesses local administator rights + but not root privilegde on the Samba host (often the case), the OpenPrinterEx() + call will fail. The result is that the client will now display an "Access + Denied; Unable to connect" message in the printer queue window (even though + jobs may successfully be printed). </P +><P +>If this parameter is enabled for a printer, then any attempt + to open the printer with the PRINTER_ACCESS_ADMINISTER right is mapped + to PRINTER_ACCESS_USE instead. Thus allowing the OpenPrinterEx() + call to succeed. <EM +>This parameter MUST not be able enabled + on a print share which has valid print driver installed on the Samba + server.</EM +></P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#DISABLESPOOLSS" +>disable spoolss</A +> + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>use client driver = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="USEMMAP" +></A +>use mmap (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This global parameter determines if the tdb internals of Samba can + depend on mmap working correctly on the running system. Samba requires a coherent + mmap/read-write system memory cache. Currently only HPUX does not have such a + coherent cache, and so this parameter is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +> by + default on HPUX. On all other systems this parameter should be left alone. This + parameter is provided to help the Samba developers track down problems with + the tdb internal code. + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>use mmap = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="USERHOSTS" +></A +>use rhosts (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>If this global parameter is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>, it specifies + that the UNIX user's <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>.rhosts</TT +> file in their home directory + will be read to find the names of hosts and users who will be allowed + access without specifying a password.</P +><P +><EM +>NOTE:</EM +> The use of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>use rhosts + </I +></TT +> can be a major security hole. This is because you are + trusting the PC to supply the correct username. It is very easy to + get a PC to supply a false username. I recommend that the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> use rhosts</I +></TT +> option be only used if you really know what + you are doing.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>use rhosts = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="USER" +></A +>user (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#USERNAME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> username</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="USERS" +></A +>users (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#USERNAME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> username</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="USERNAME" +></A +>username (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited + list, in which case the supplied password will be tested against + each username in turn (left to right).</P +><P +>The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>username</I +></TT +> line is needed only when + the PC is unable to supply its own username. This is the case + for the COREPLUS protocol or where your users have different WfWg + usernames to UNIX usernames. In both these cases you may also be + better using the \\server\share%user syntax instead.</P +><P +>The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>username</I +></TT +> line is not a great + solution in many cases as it means Samba will try to validate + the supplied password against each of the usernames in the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>username</I +></TT +> line in turn. This is slow and + a bad idea for lots of users in case of duplicate passwords. + You may get timeouts or security breaches using this parameter + unwisely.</P +><P +>Samba relies on the underlying UNIX security. This + parameter does not restrict who can login, it just offers hints + to the Samba server as to what usernames might correspond to the + supplied password. Users can login as whoever they please and + they will be able to do no more damage than if they started a + telnet session. The daemon runs as the user that they log in as, + so they cannot do anything that user cannot do.</P +><P +>To restrict a service to a particular set of users you + can use the <A +HREF="#VALIDUSERS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>valid users + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>If any of the usernames begin with a '@' then the name + will be looked up first in the NIS netgroups list (if Samba + is compiled with netgroup support), followed by a lookup in + the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users + in the group of that name.</P +><P +>If any of the usernames begin with a '+' then the name + will be looked up only in the UNIX groups database and will + expand to a list of all users in the group of that name.</P +><P +>If any of the usernames begin with a '&'then the name + will be looked up only in the NIS netgroups database (if Samba + is compiled with netgroup support) and will expand to a list + of all users in the netgroup group of that name.</P +><P +>Note that searching though a groups database can take + quite some time, and some clients may time out during the + search.</P +><P +>See the section <A +HREF="#AEN236" +>NOTE ABOUT + USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A +> for more information on how + this parameter determines access to the services.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>The guest account if a guest service, + else <empty string>.</B +></P +><P +>Examples:<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>username = fred, mary, jack, jane, + @users, @pcgroup</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="USERNAMELEVEL" +></A +>username level (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option helps Samba to try and 'guess' at + the real UNIX username, as many DOS clients send an all-uppercase + username. By default Samba tries all lowercase, followed by the + username with the first letter capitalized, and fails if the + username is not found on the UNIX machine.</P +><P +>If this parameter is set to non-zero the behavior changes. + This parameter is a number that specifies the number of uppercase + combinations to try while trying to determine the UNIX user name. The + higher the number the more combinations will be tried, but the slower + the discovery of usernames will be. Use this parameter when you have + strange usernames on your UNIX machine, such as <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>AstrangeUser + </TT +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>username level = 0</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>username level = 5</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="USERNAMEMAP" +></A +>username map (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows you to specify a file containing + a mapping of usernames from the clients to the server. This can be + used for several purposes. The most common is to map usernames + that users use on DOS or Windows machines to those that the UNIX + box uses. The other is to map multiple users to a single username + so that they can more easily share files.</P +><P +>The map file is parsed line by line. Each line should + contain a single UNIX username on the left then a '=' followed + by a list of usernames on the right. The list of usernames on the + right may contain names of the form @group in which case they + will match any UNIX username in that group. The special client + name '*' is a wildcard and matches any name. Each line of the + map file may be up to 1023 characters long.</P +><P +>The file is processed on each line by taking the + supplied username and comparing it with each username on the right + hand side of the '=' signs. If the supplied name matches any of + the names on the right hand side then it is replaced with the name + on the left. Processing then continues with the next line.</P +><P +>If any line begins with a '#' or a ';' then it is + ignored</P +><P +>If any line begins with an '!' then the processing + will stop after that line if a mapping was done by the line. + Otherwise mapping continues with every line being processed. + Using '!' is most useful when you have a wildcard mapping line + later in the file.</P +><P +>For example to map from the name <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>admin</TT +> + or <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>administrator</TT +> to the UNIX name <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +> root</TT +> you would use:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>root = admin administrator</B +></P +><P +>Or to map anyone in the UNIX group <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>system</TT +> + to the UNIX name <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>sys</TT +> you would use:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>sys = @system</B +></P +><P +>You can have as many mappings as you like in a username + map file.</P +><P +>If your system supports the NIS NETGROUP option then + the netgroup database is checked before the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/group + </TT +> database for matching groups.</P +><P +>You can map Windows usernames that have spaces in them + by using double quotes around the name. For example:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>tridge = "Andrew Tridgell"</B +></P +><P +>would map the windows username "Andrew Tridgell" to the + unix username "tridge".</P +><P +>The following example would map mary and fred to the + unix user sys, and map the rest to guest. Note the use of the + '!' to tell Samba to stop processing if it gets a match on + that line.</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> !sys = mary fred + guest = * + </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +><P +>Note that the remapping is applied to all occurrences + of usernames. Thus if you connect to \\server\fred and <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +> fred</TT +> is remapped to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>mary</TT +> then you + will actually be connecting to \\server\mary and will need to + supply a password suitable for <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>mary</TT +> not + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>fred</TT +>. The only exception to this is the + username passed to the <A +HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> password server</I +></TT +></A +> (if you have one). The password + server will receive whatever username the client supplies without + modification.</P +><P +>Also note that no reverse mapping is done. The main effect + this has is with printing. Users who have been mapped may have + trouble deleting print jobs as PrintManager under WfWg will think + they don't own the print job.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>no username map</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>username map = /usr/local/samba/lib/users.map + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="UTMP" +></A +>utmp (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter is only available if + Samba has been configured and compiled with the option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> --with-utmp</B +>. If set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +> then Samba will attempt + to add utmp or utmpx records (depending on the UNIX system) whenever a + connection is made to a Samba server. Sites may use this to record the + user connecting to a Samba share.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#UTMPDIRECTORY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> utmp directory</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>utmp = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="UTMPDIRECTORY" +></A +>utmp directory(G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter is only available if Samba has + been configured and compiled with the option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> --with-utmp</B +>. It specifies a directory pathname that is + used to store the utmp or utmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that + record user connections to a Samba server. See also the <A +HREF="#UTMP" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>utmp</I +></TT +></A +> parameter. By default this is + not set, meaning the system will use whatever utmp file the + native system is set to use (usually + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/var/run/utmp</TT +> on Linux).</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>no utmp directory</EM +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="VALIDUSERS" +></A +>valid users (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a list of users that should be allowed + to login to this service. Names starting with '@', '+' and '&' + are interpreted using the same rules as described in the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>invalid users</I +></TT +> parameter.</P +><P +>If this is empty (the default) then any user can login. + If a username is in both this list and the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>invalid + users</I +></TT +> list then access is denied for that user.</P +><P +>The current servicename is substituted for <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%S + </I +></TT +>. This is useful in the [homes] section.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#INVALIDUSERS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>invalid users + </I +></TT +></A +></P +><P +>Default: <EM +>No valid users list (anyone can login) + </EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>valid users = greg, @pcusers</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="VETOFILES" +></A +>veto files(S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a list of files and directories that + are neither visible nor accessible. Each entry in the list must + be separated by a '/', which allows spaces to be included + in the entry. '*' and '?' can be used to specify multiple files + or directories as in DOS wildcards.</P +><P +>Each entry must be a unix path, not a DOS path and + must <EM +>not</EM +> include the unix directory + separator '/'.</P +><P +>Note that the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>case sensitive</I +></TT +> option + is applicable in vetoing files.</P +><P +>One feature of the veto files parameter that it + is important to be aware of is Samba's behaviour when + trying to delete a directory. If a directory that is + to be deleted contains nothing but veto files this + deletion will <EM +>fail</EM +> unless you also set + the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete veto files</I +></TT +> parameter to + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>yes</I +></TT +>.</P +><P +>Setting this parameter will affect the performance + of Samba, as it will be forced to check all files and directories + for a match as they are scanned.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#HIDEFILES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hide files + </I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#CASESENSITIVE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> case sensitive</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>No files or directories are vetoed. + </EM +></P +><P +>Examples:<TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>; Veto any files containing the word Security, +; any ending in .tmp, and any directory containing the +; word root. +veto files = /*Security*/*.tmp/*root*/ + +; Veto the Apple specific files that a NetAtalk server +; creates. +veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="VETOOPLOCKFILES" +></A +>veto oplock files (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter is only valid when the <A +HREF="#OPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>oplocks</I +></TT +></A +> + parameter is turned on for a share. It allows the Samba administrator + to selectively turn off the granting of oplocks on selected files that + match a wildcarded list, similar to the wildcarded list used in the + <A +HREF="#VETOFILES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>veto files</I +></TT +></A +> + parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>No files are vetoed for oplock + grants</EM +></P +><P +>You might want to do this on files that you know will + be heavily contended for by clients. A good example of this + is in the NetBench SMB benchmark program, which causes heavy + client contention for files ending in <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>.SEM</TT +>. + To cause Samba not to grant oplocks on these files you would use + the line (either in the [global] section or in the section for + the particular NetBench share :</P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>veto oplock files = /*.SEM/ + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="VFSOBJECT" +></A +>vfs object (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies a shared object file that + is used for Samba VFS I/O operations. By default, normal + disk I/O operations are used but these can be overloaded + with a VFS object. The Samba VFS layer is new to Samba 2.2 and + must be enabled at compile time with --with-vfs.</P +><P +>Default : <EM +>no value</EM +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="VFSOPTIONS" +></A +>vfs options (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter allows parameters to be passed + to the vfs layer at initialization time. The Samba VFS layer + is new to Samba 2.2 and must be enabled at compile time + with --with-vfs. See also <A +HREF="#VFSOBJECT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> vfs object</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default : <EM +>no value</EM +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="VOLUME" +></A +>volume (S)</DT +><DD +><P +> This allows you to override the volume label + returned for a share. Useful for CDROMs with installation programs + that insist on a particular volume label.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>the name of the share</EM +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WIDELINKS" +></A +>wide links (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter controls whether or not links + in the UNIX file system may be followed by the server. Links + that point to areas within the directory tree exported by the + server are always allowed; this parameter controls access only + to areas that are outside the directory tree being exported.</P +><P +>Note that setting this parameter can have a negative + effect on your server performance due to the extra system calls + that Samba has to do in order to perform the link checks.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>wide links = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WINBINDCACHETIME" +></A +>winbind cache time</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the number of seconds the + <A +HREF="winbindd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>winbindd(8)</A +> daemon will cache + user and group information before querying a Windows NT server + again.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>winbind cache type = 15</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WINBINDENUMUSERS" +></A +>winbind enum + users</DT +><DD +><P +>On large installations using + <A +HREF="winbindd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>winbindd(8)</A +> it may be + necessary to suppress the enumeration of users through the + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> setpwent()</B +>, + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>getpwent()</B +> and + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>endpwent()</B +> group of system calls. If + the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>winbind enum users</I +></TT +> parameter is + false, calls to the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>getpwent</B +> system call + will not return any data. </P +><P +><EM +>Warning:</EM +> Turning off user + enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly. For + example, the finger program relies on having access to the + full user list when searching for matching + usernames. </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>winbind enum users = yes </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WINBINDENUMGROUPS" +></A +>winbind enum + groups</DT +><DD +><P +>On large installations using + <A +HREF="winbindd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>winbindd(8)</A +> it may be + necessary to suppress the enumeration of groups through the + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> setgrent()</B +>, + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>getgrent()</B +> and + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>endgrent()</B +> group of system calls. If + the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>winbind enum groups</I +></TT +> parameter is + false, calls to the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>getgrent()</B +> system + call will not return any data. </P +><P +><EM +>Warning:</EM +> Turning off group + enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly. + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>winbind enum groups = yes </B +> + </P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WINBINDGID" +></A +>winbind gid</DT +><DD +><P +>The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of group + ids that are allocated by the <A +HREF="winbindd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> winbindd(8)</A +> daemon. This range of group ids should have no + existing local or NIS groups within it as strange conflicts can + occur otherwise.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>winbind gid = <empty string> + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>winbind gid = 10000-20000</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WINBINDSEPARATOR" +></A +>winbind separator</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter allows an admin to define the character + used when listing a username of the form of <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>DOMAIN + </I +></TT +>\<TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>user</I +></TT +>. This parameter + is only applicable when using the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_winbind.so</TT +> + and <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>nss_winbind.so</TT +> modules for UNIX services. + </P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>winbind separator = \</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>winbind separator = +</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WINBINDUID" +></A +>winbind uid</DT +><DD +><P +>The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of group + ids that are allocated by the <A +HREF="winbindd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> winbindd(8)</A +> daemon. This range of ids should have no + existing local or NIS users within it as strange conflicts can + occur otherwise.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>winbind uid = <empty string> + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>winbind uid = 10000-20000</B +></P +></DD +><DT +>winbind use default domain, <A +NAME="WINBINDUSEDEFAULTDOMAIN" +></A +>winbind use default domain</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies whether the <A +HREF="winbindd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> winbindd(8)</A +> + daemon should operate on users without domain component in their username. + Users without a domain component are treated as is part of the winbindd server's + own domain. While this does not benifit Windows users, it makes SSH, FTP and e-mail + function in a way much closer to the way they would in a native unix system.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>winbind use default domain = <falseg> + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>winbind use default domain = true</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WINSHOOK" +></A +>wins hook (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>When Samba is running as a WINS server this + allows you to call an external program for all changes to the + WINS database. The primary use for this option is to allow the + dynamic update of external name resolution databases such as + dynamic DNS.</P +><P +>The wins hook parameter specifies the name of a script + or executable that will be called as follows:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>wins_hook operation name nametype ttl IP_list + </B +></P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>The first argument is the operation and is one + of "add", "delete", or "refresh". In most cases the operation can + be ignored as the rest of the parameters provide sufficient + information. Note that "refresh" may sometimes be called when the + name has not previously been added, in that case it should be treated + as an add.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>The second argument is the NetBIOS name. If the + name is not a legal name then the wins hook is not called. + Legal names contain only letters, digits, hyphens, underscores + and periods.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>The third argument is the NetBIOS name + type as a 2 digit hexadecimal number. </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>The fourth argument is the TTL (time to live) + for the name in seconds.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>The fifth and subsequent arguments are the IP + addresses currently registered for that name. If this list is + empty then the name should be deleted.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>An example script that calls the BIND dynamic DNS update + program <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nsupdate</B +> is provided in the examples + directory of the Samba source code. </P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WINSPROXY" +></A +>wins proxy (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a boolean that controls if <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> will respond to broadcast name + queries on behalf of other hosts. You may need to set this + to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +> for some older clients.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>wins proxy = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WINSSERVER" +></A +>wins server (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This specifies the IP address (or DNS name: IP + address for preference) of the WINS server that <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> nmbd(8)</A +> should register with. If you have a WINS server on + your network then you should set this to the WINS server's IP.</P +><P +>You should point this at your WINS server if you have a + multi-subnetted network.</P +><P +><EM +>NOTE</EM +>. You need to set up Samba to point + to a WINS server if you have multiple subnets and wish cross-subnet + browsing to work correctly.</P +><P +>See the documentation file <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>BROWSING.txt</TT +> + in the docs/ directory of your Samba source distribution.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>not enabled</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>wins server = 192.9.200.1</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WINSSUPPORT" +></A +>wins support (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean controls if the <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> + nmbd(8)</A +> process in Samba will act as a WINS server. You should + not set this to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +> unless you have a multi-subnetted network and + you wish a particular <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> to be your WINS server. + Note that you should <EM +>NEVER</EM +> set this to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +> + on more than one machine in your network.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>wins support = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WORKGROUP" +></A +>workgroup (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls what workgroup your server will + appear to be in when queried by clients. Note that this parameter + also controls the Domain name used with the <A +HREF="#SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = domain</B +></A +> + setting.</P +><P +>Default: <EM +>set at compile time to WORKGROUP</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>workgroup = MYGROUP</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WRITABLE" +></A +>writable (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#WRITEABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> writeable</I +></TT +></A +> for people who can't spell :-).</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WRITECACHESIZE" +></A +>write cache size (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>If this integer parameter is set to non-zero value, + Samba will create an in-memory cache for each oplocked file + (it does <EM +>not</EM +> do this for + non-oplocked files). All writes that the client does not request + to be flushed directly to disk will be stored in this cache if possible. + The cache is flushed onto disk when a write comes in whose offset + would not fit into the cache or when the file is closed by the client. + Reads for the file are also served from this cache if the data is stored + within it.</P +><P +>This cache allows Samba to batch client writes into a more + efficient write size for RAID disks (i.e. writes may be tuned to + be the RAID stripe size) and can improve performance on systems + where the disk subsystem is a bottleneck but there is free + memory for userspace programs.</P +><P +>The integer parameter specifies the size of this cache + (per oplocked file) in bytes.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>write cache size = 0</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>write cache size = 262144</B +></P +><P +>for a 256k cache size per file.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WRITELIST" +></A +>write list (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a list of users that are given read-write + access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list then + they will be given write access, no matter what the <A +HREF="#WRITEABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>writeable</I +></TT +></A +> + option is set to. The list can include group names using the + @group syntax.</P +><P +>Note that if a user is in both the read list and the + write list then they will be given write access.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#READLIST" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>read list + </I +></TT +></A +> option.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>write list = <empty string> + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>write list = admin, root, @staff + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WRITEOK" +></A +>write ok (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#WRITEABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> writeable</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WRITERAW" +></A +>write raw (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter controls whether or not the server + will support raw write SMB's when transferring data from clients. + You should never need to change this parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>write raw = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WRITEABLE" +></A +>writeable (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>An inverted synonym is <A +HREF="#READONLY" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>read only</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>If this parameter is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +>, then users + of a service may not create or modify files in the service's + directory.</P +><P +>Note that a printable service (<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printable = yes</B +>) + will <EM +>ALWAYS</EM +> allow writing to the directory + (user privileges permitting), but only via spooling operations.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>writeable = no</B +></P +></DD +></DL +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN5973" +></A +><H2 +>WARNINGS</H2 +><P +>Although the configuration file permits service names + to contain spaces, your client software may not. Spaces will + be ignored in comparisons anyway, so it shouldn't be a + problem - but be aware of the possibility.</P +><P +>On a similar note, many clients - especially DOS clients - + limit service names to eight characters. <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8) + </A +> has no such limitation, but attempts to connect from such + clients will fail if they truncate the service names. For this reason + you should probably keep your service names down to eight characters + in length.</P +><P +>Use of the [homes] and [printers] special sections make life + for an administrator easy, but the various combinations of default + attributes can be tricky. Take extreme care when designing these + sections. In particular, ensure that the permissions on spool + directories are correct.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN5979" +></A +><H2 +>VERSION</H2 +><P +>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of + the Samba suite.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN5982" +></A +><H2 +>SEE ALSO</H2 +><P +><A +HREF="samba.7.html" +TARGET="_top" +>samba(7)</A +>, + <A +HREF="smbpasswd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd(8)</B +></A +>, + <A +HREF="swat.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>swat(8)</B +></A +>, + <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +>, + <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd(8)</B +></A +>, + <A +HREF="smbclient.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbclient(1)</B +></A +>, + <A +HREF="nmblookup.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmblookup(1)</B +></A +>, + <A +HREF="testparm.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>testparm(1)</B +></A +>, + <A +HREF="testprns.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>testprns(1)</B +></A +> + </P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN6002" +></A +><H2 +>AUTHOR</H2 +><P +>The original Samba software and related utilities + were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed + by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar + to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</P +><P +>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. + The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + <A +HREF="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/" +TARGET="_top" +> ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</A +>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 + release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</P +></DIV +></BODY +></HTML +>
\ No newline at end of file |